MP-X Devices - SBO - Feb 8 - 2018

StruxureWare
MP-X Engineering
Receptacle
xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx
StruxureWare
MP-X Engineering
Receptacle
xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx
Copyright © 2018 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
The Schneider Electric brand and any registered trademarks of Schneider Electric Industries SAS referred to in this guide are the sole property of Schneider
Electric SA and its subsidiaries. They may not be used for any purpose without the owner's permission, given in writing. This guide and its content are
protected, within the meaning of the French intellectual property code (Code de la propriété intellectuelle français, referred to hereafter as "the Code"), under
the laws of copyright covering texts, drawings and models, as well as by trademark law. You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, non-
commercial use as defined in the Code, all or part of this guide on any medium whatsoever without Schneider Electric's permission, given in writing. You also
agree not to establish any hypertext links to this guide or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for the personal and non-
commercial use of the guide or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Contents
Reference
1 MP Series Controller Introduction ................................. 21
1.1 MP Series Controller Overview .................................................... 23
1.1.1 MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards ............................ 23
1.1.2 MP Series Controller Types ....................................................... 23
1.1.3 MP Series Controller Management and Communication ............ 23
1.1.4 MP Series Controller I/O Points ................................................. 23
1.1.5 MP Series Controller Value Objects ........................................... 24
1.1.6 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers ................... 24
1.1.7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers ... 24
1.1.8 SmartX Sensors ........................................................................ 24
1.1.9 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool ...................................... 25
1.1.10 VAV Support and the MP Series Controller - MP-V .................... 25
1.2 MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards .............................. 26
1.2.1 MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support ................................... 26
1.2.2 MP Series Controller Networking Standards .............................. 26
1.2.3 MP Series Controller Network Topologies ................................. 26
1.2.4 Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller Network Workflow .. 27
1.2.5 Before Hosting an MP Series Controller ..................................... 27
1.2.6 EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP Series Controller ........ 27
1.2.7 IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers ...................... 27
1.3 MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support .................................... 28
1.3.1 Additional Functions .................................................................. 28
1.3.2 BACnet and IP Routing ............................................................. 28
1.4 Configuring MP Series Controller IP Network Settings ................. 30
1.5 Discarding MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Changes .... 33
1.6 Configuring Ethernet Port 2 on the SmartX Server ....................... 34
1.7 Creating an IP Network on the SmartX Server ............................. 35
1.8 Configuring a Shared IP Network for MP Series Controllers Using
WorkStation ................................................................................ 36
1.9 MP Series Controller Networking Standards ................................ 37
1.10 MP Series Controller Network Topologies ................................... 38
1.10.1 Star .......................................................................................... 38
1.10.2 Daisy Chain ............................................................................... 39
1.10.3 RSTP ....................................................................................... 39
xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

5
1.10.4 Hybrid ....................................................................................... 40
1.11 Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller Network Workflow .... 42
1.12 Before Hosting an MP Series Controller ....................................... 44
1.13 EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP Series Controller .......... 46
1.13.1 Controller Hosting ..................................................................... 46
1.13.2 BACnet Interface ...................................................................... 47
1.13.3 BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) Restrictions ................. 48
1.14 IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers ........................ 49
1.14.1 Methods for Assigning IP Addresses ......................................... 49
1.14.2 DHCP Server Options ............................................................... 50
1.14.3 IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover ................................ 50
1.15 IP Address Settings for IP Communications ................................. 51
1.16 DHCP Server Options ................................................................ 53
1.16.1 SmartX AS-P Server or SmartX AS-B Server with DHCP on a Local
Network .................................................................................... 53
1.16.2 Router or Switch with DHCP on a Local Network ...................... 54
1.16.3 Computer with DHCP on a Local Network ................................. 54
1.16.4 DHCP Server on a Remote Network Using a Relay Agent .......... 55
1.17 IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover .................................. 56
1.17.1 Failover and IP Address Reassignment ...................................... 56
1.17.2 MP-C Add-on Display ............................................................... 56
2 MP Series Controller Creation and Configuration .......... 59

2.1 MP Series Controllers ................................................................. 61
2.1.1 MP Series Controller Models ..................................................... 61
2.1.2 MP Series Controller Memory .................................................... 61
2.1.3 MP Series Controller Reset Modes ............................................ 61
2.1.4 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module ................................. 61
2.1.5 Configure MP Series Controller Workflow .................................. 62
2.1.6 MP Series Controller Standard Objects ..................................... 62
2.2 Creating an MP Series Controller ................................................ 63
2.3 Replacing an MP Series Controller .............................................. 64
2.4 Deleting an MP Series Controller ................................................. 65
2.5 Renewing DHCP ......................................................................... 66
2.6 MP Series Controller Models ....................................................... 67
2.7 MP Series Controller Memory ...................................................... 69
2.8 MP Series Controller Reset Modes .............................................. 70
2.8.1 Retain Levels for Variables ......................................................... 71
2.9 Performing a Field Deploy for an MP Series Controller
Application .................................................................................. 72
2.10 Adding an IP Address to the White List in an MP Series
Controller .................................................................................... 73
2.11 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module ................................... 74
2.12 Configuring Terminals on the Onboard I/O Module ...................... 75
2.13 Configure MP Series Controller Workflow .................................... 76
2.14 Initializing the BACnet ID of an MP Series Controller .................... 79
2.15 Changing an MP Series Controller Device ID ............................... 80
2.16 MP Series Controller References and Device ID Changes ............ 81
MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

6
2.17 MP Series Controller Standard Objects ....................................... 82
2.18 Resetting MP Series Controller Type Information ........................ 84
3 MP Series Controller Management and

Communication ........................................................... 85
3.1 MP Series Controller Management and Communication .............. 87
3.1.1 MP Series Controller Device Management ................................. 87
3.1.2 MP Series Controller Diagnostics .............................................. 87
3.1.3 Device Discovery for MP Series Controllers ............................... 87
3.1.4 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow .................................... 87
3.1.5 Automatic Time Sync for MP Series Controllers ......................... 87
3.1.6 MP Series Controller Firmware Management ............................. 88
3.1.7 MP Series Controller Communication ........................................ 88
3.1.8 MP Series Controller Device Communication Commands .......... 88
3.1.9 MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD Registration ........... 88
3.1.10 MP Series Controller Download and Upload .............................. 88
3.1.11 Associate an MP Series Controller ............................................. 89
3.2 MP Series Controller Device Management ................................... 90
3.2.1 Uninitialized MP Series Controllers ............................................ 90
3.2.2 Non-conformant Devices .......................................................... 91
3.2.3 Third-party Client Management ................................................ 92
3.2.4 MP Series Controller References and Device ID Changes .......... 92
3.3 MP Series Controller Diagnostics ................................................ 94
3.3.1 Error Log .................................................................................. 94
3.3.2 Device Report ........................................................................... 95
3.3.3 Crash Report File ...................................................................... 96
3.3.4 Commissioning Log .................................................................. 96
3.3.5 IO Checkout Report .................................................................. 97
3.3.6 Flow Balance Logs .................................................................... 97
3.4 Retrieving MP Series Controller Diagnostics ................................ 98
3.5 Device Discovery for MP Series Controllers ................................. 99
3.5.1 Hiding Devices .......................................................................... 99
3.5.2 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow .................................... 99
3.6 Discovering MP Series Controllers ............................................ 100
3.7 Hiding MP Series Controllers in Device Discovery ..................... 101
3.8 Clearing MP Series Controller Host Information ........................ 102
3.9 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow .................................... 103
3.10 Automatic Time Sync for MP Series Controllers ......................... 104
3.11 MP Series Controller Firmware Management ............................. 105
3.11.1 Hosting Different Firmware Versions ........................................ 105
3.11.2 Firmware Upgrade Guidelines ................................................. 106
3.11.3 Active and Inactive Memory for Firmware ................................ 106
3.11.4 Firmware Recovery ................................................................. 106
3.12 Updating Firmware in MP Series Controllers .............................. 108
3.13 MP Series Controller Communication ....................................... 109
3.14 MP Series Controller Device Communication Commands .......... 110
3.15 MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD Registration ........... 111

7
3.16 Registering an MP Series Controller as a Foreign Device .......... 112
3.17 Renewing Foreign Device Registration ....................................... 113
3.18 MP Series Controller Download and Upload Commands ........... 114
3.19 Associate an MP Series Controller ............................................. 115
4 MP Series Controller I/O Points .................................. 117

4.1 MP Series Controller I/O Points ................................................. 119
4.1.1 Universal Inputs ...................................................................... 119
4.1.2 Universal Inputs/Outputs ......................................................... 119
4.1.3 Triac Outputs .......................................................................... 120
4.1.4 Analog Output ........................................................................ 120
4.1.5 Relay Outputs ......................................................................... 120
4.1.6 High Power Relay Output ........................................................ 120
4.2 MP Series Controller Persistence .............................................. 121
4.3 MP Series Controller Unit Conversion ....................................... 124
4.3.1 Conversion Factor ................................................................... 125
4.3.2 Control Loop Unit Configuration .............................................. 125
4.4 Creating an MP Series Controller Input Point ............................. 127
4.5 Configuring an MP Series Controller Counter Input Point ........... 129
4.6 Configuring an MP Series Controller Current Input Point ............ 132
4.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Input Point .............. 135
4.8 Configuring an MP Series Controller Resistive Input Point .......... 138
4.9 Configuring an MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input
Point ......................................................................................... 141
4.10 Configuring an MP Series Controller Supervised Input Point ...... 144
4.11 Configuring an MP Series Controller Temperature Input Point .... 147
4.12 Configuring an MP Series Controller Voltage Input Point ............ 150
4.13 Creating an MP Series Controller Output Point .......................... 153
4.14 Configuring an MP Series Controller Current Output Point ......... 155
4.15 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Output Point ........... 159
4.16 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Point 163
4.17 Configuring an MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output
Point ......................................................................................... 167
4.18 Configuring an MP Series Controller Tristate Output Point ......... 171
4.19 Configuring an MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output
Point ......................................................................................... 175
4.20 Configuring an MP Series Controller Voltage Output Point ......... 179
5 MP Series Controller Value Objects ............................ 183

5.1 MP Series Controller Value Objects ........................................... 185
5.1.1 MP Series Controller Reliability ................................................ 185
5.1.2 MP Series Controller External Bindings .................................... 185
5.1.3 Binding Value and Priority Properties in an MP Series
Controller ................................................................................ 186
5.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Value Object .......................... 187
5.3 Configuring an MP Series Controller Analog Value ..................... 188
5.4 Configuring an MP Series Controller DateTime Value ................. 191
5.5 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Value ...................... 194

8
5.6 Configuring an MP Series Controller Multistate Value ................. 198
5.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller String Value ....................... 201
5.8 MP Series Controller Reliability ................................................. 203
5.9 MP Series Controller External Bindings ...................................... 205
5.9.1 Value Exchange ...................................................................... 205
5.9.2 Types of External Bindings ...................................................... 205
5.10 Creating an MP Series Controller External Binding ..................... 207
5.11 Configuring an MP Series Controller Consumer Value ................ 208
5.12 Configuring an MP Series Controller Producer Value ................. 210
5.13 Binding Value and Priority Properties in an MP Series Controller 212
6 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers .... 215

6.1 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers ................... 217
6.1.1 Example Program ................................................................... 217
6.1.2 Script Program Considerations ............................................... 218
6.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Script Program or Function .... 219
6.3 Creating an MP Series Controller Function Block Program ........ 220
6.4 Creating an MP Series Controller Control Loop .......................... 221
7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend Logs for MP Series

Controllers ................................................................. 223
7.1 Schedules for MP Series Controllers .......................................... 225
7.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Calendar ................................ 226
7.3 Creating an MP Series Controller Schedule ............................... 227
7.4 Alarms for MP Series Controllers ............................................... 228
7.4.1 BACnet Setup and Configuration ............................................ 228
7.4.2 System Alarms ........................................................................ 228
7.4.3 Offline Alarm and Event Buffering ............................................ 229
7.5 Creating an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm ........................ 230
7.6 Configuring an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm ................... 231
7.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller System Alarm .................... 234
7.8 Creating an MP Series Controller Notification Class ................... 236
7.9 Configuring an MP Series Controller Notification Class .............. 237
7.10 Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers ........................................ 239
7.10.1 Log Views ............................................................................... 239
7.10.2 Trend Log Storage Guidelines ................................................. 239
7.11 Extended Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers ......................... 240
8 SmartX Sensors ......................................................... 241

8.1 SmartX Sensors ........................................................................ 243
8.1.1 Models ................................................................................... 243
8.1.2 Display Object ......................................................................... 244
8.1.3 Firmware Upgrade .................................................................. 244
8.1.4 Replacement .......................................................................... 245
8.1.5 Addressing ............................................................................. 245
8.1.6 Operation and Calibration Modes ............................................ 246
8.2 SmartX Sensor Display Object ................................................. 247
8.2.1 Display Object Property Tabs .................................................. 247

9
8.2.2 SmartX Sensor and Display Object Property Mapping ............. 248
8.3 Creating a SmartX Sensor ......................................................... 251
8.4 Configuring a SmartX Sensor .................................................... 252
8.5 SmartX Sensor Operation and Calibration Modes ...................... 255
8.6 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Object ......................................... 256
8.7 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object ....................... 259
8.8 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Display Object ............................. 262
9 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ....................... 267

9.1 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ...................................... 269
9.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor 3-Button
Cover Model ............................................................................. 271
9.3 LED Behavior in the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ....... 272
9.4 Overriding the Occupancy Setting in a SmartX Sensor 3-Button
Cover Model ............................................................................. 273
10 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ........ 275

10.1 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ....................... 277
10.1.1 Display Object Setting Control ................................................. 277
10.1.2 Watch Window Property Monitoring ........................................ 278
10.2 Toggling Through the Menus on the SmartX Sensor LCD
Temperature Sensor Model ....................................................... 279
10.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor LCD
10.4 Changing the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model ........................................................................... 283
10.5 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings in a SmartX Sensor
LCD Temperature Sensor Model ............................................... 285
10.6 Changing the Degree Type in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model ........................................................................... 287
10.7 Changing the Occupancy Mode in a SmartX Sensor LCD
11 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Mode ................ 291

11.1 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model .............................. 293
11.1.1 Display Object ......................................................................... 294
11.1.2 Script Program Property Configuration .................................... 295
11.1.3 Menu Page ............................................................................. 295
11.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor
Touchscreen Display Model ...................................................... 296
11.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted SmartX Sensor
11.4 Configuring the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display
Model ....................................................................................... 300
11.5 Configuring the Temperature Units in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen
Display Model ........................................................................... 303
11.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode or Override in a SmartX Sensor
11.7 Changing the Unit View in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display
Model ....................................................................................... 309

10
11.8 Accessing and Viewing Submenus in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen
Display Model ........................................................................... 312
12 SmartX Sensors User Interface .................................. 315

12.1 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface ....................... 317
12.2 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default
Screen ...................................................................................... 318
12.3 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Default Screen ..... 319
12.4 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Temperature Change
Screen ...................................................................................... 320
12.5 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Main Menu ........... 322
12.6 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Submenus ........... 324
13 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool ....................... 327

13.1 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool ...................................... 329
13.1.1 Configure eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Initial Connection
Workflow ................................................................................ 329
13.1.2 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Connection Options ..... 329
13.2 Configure the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Initial
Connection Workflow ................................................................ 330
13.3 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Connection Options ...... 333
13.3.1 Wired Direct ............................................................................ 333
13.3.2 Wired Network ........................................................................ 333
13.3.3 WIFI Access Point ................................................................... 333
13.3.4 eCommission Bluetooth Adapter and SmartX Sensor .............. 334
14 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Configuration .. 335

14.1 Variable Air Volume Data Support and the MP-V ....................... 337
14.1.1 Air Flow and Flow Balancing .................................................... 337
14.1.2 Variable Air Volume Data Objects ............................................ 337
14.2 Air Flow and Flow Balancing ..................................................... 338
14.2.1 Flow Balance Data Object Calibration ...................................... 338
14.2.2 Flow Balance Log and Report ................................................. 338
14.2.3 Flow Balance Data Backup and Restore ................................. 339
14.2.4 Flow Balance Data Backup and Restore Guidelines ................. 340
14.3 Viewing Stored Backup Data in an MP-V .................................. 341
14.4 Backing Up Flow Balance Data in an MP-V .............................. 342
14.5 Restoring Flow Balance Data in an MP-V .................................. 343
14.6 Performing Simultaneous Backups on Multiple MP-Vs ............. 344
14.7 Variable Air Volume Data Objects .............................................. 345
14.7.1 Physical Inputs and Outputs .................................................... 345
14.7.2 Flow Setpoint .......................................................................... 346
14.7.3 Custom Controls ..................................................................... 347
14.7.4 Objects for the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool ............. 347
14.7.5 Priority Levels .......................................................................... 348
14.7.6 VAV Heating and Cooling Control ............................................ 348
14.8 Cooling and Heating Control in a VAV Box ................................ 350
14.8.1 VAV Cooling Control ............................................................... 350
14.8.2 VAV Heating Control ............................................................... 351

11
14.9 Configuring MP-V Analog Reheat .............................................. 352
14.10 Configuring MP-V Box Flow ...................................................... 356
14.11 Configuring an MP-V Damper Command .................................. 359
14.12 Configuring MP-V Digital Reheat .............................................. 363
14.13 Configuring MP-V Discharge Air Temp ...................................... 367
14.14 Configuring an MP-V Effective Reheat Command ...................... 370
14.15 Configuring MP-V Fan Operation ............................................... 373
14.16 Configuring MP-V Flow Balance Data ........................................ 377
14.17 Configuring an MP-V Flow Setpoint ........................................... 380
14.18 Configuring MP-V Velocity Pressure .......................................... 384
14.19 Configuring an MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object .............. 388
15 MP-V User Interface ................................................... 391

15.1 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Basic Tab ............................. 393
15.2 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Advanced Tab ...................... 396
15.3 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Command Tab ..................... 397
15.4 MP-V Box Flow Properties – Basic Tab ..................................... 399
15.5 MP-V Box Flow Properties – Advanced Tab .............................. 401
15.6 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Basic Tab ...................... 402
15.7 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Advanced Tab ............... 405
15.8 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Command Tab .............. 406
15.9 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Basic Tab .............................. 408
15.10 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Advanced Tab ....................... 411
15.11 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Command Tab ...................... 412
15.12 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Basic Tab ..................... 414
15.13 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Advanced Tab .............. 416
15.14 MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Basic Tab ......... 417
15.15 MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Advanced Tab .. 419
15.16 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Basic Tab .............................. 420
15.17 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Advanced Tab ....................... 423
15.18 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Command Tab ...................... 424
15.19 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Basic Tab ....................... 426
15.20 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Advanced Tab ................ 428
15.21 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Basic Tab ............................... 429
15.22 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Advanced Tab ....................... 432
15.23 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Command Tab ....................... 433
15.24 MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties – Basic Tab ......................... 435
15.25 MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties – Advanced Tab .................. 438
15.26 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties – Basic Tab ... 439
15.27 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 442
16 MP-V Troubleshooting ............................................... 443

16.1 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Stuck Damper Diagnostic
Message ................................................................................... 445
16.1.1 Solution .................................................................................. 445
16.2 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Control Loss Diagnostic
Message ................................................................................... 446

12
16.2.1 Solution .................................................................................. 446
16.3 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Neg. Press Diagnostic
Message ................................................................................... 447
16.3.1 Solution .................................................................................. 447
16.4 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Over Range Diagnostic
Message ................................................................................... 448
16.4.1 Solution .................................................................................. 448
17 MP Series Controller User Interface ............................ 449

17.1 MP Series Controller System Tree Icons .................................... 455
17.2 MP Series Controller Properties – Basic Tab .............................. 456
17.3 MP Series Controller Properties – Advanced Tab ....................... 458
17.4 Generate Image Dialog Box ....................................................... 461
17.5 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module Terminal Point
Properties – Basic Tab .............................................................. 462
17.6 MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 463
17.7 MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 465
17.8 MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Basic Tab ................ 466
17.9 MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Advanced Tab ......... 468
17.10 Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box ............................................ 469
17.11 MP Series Controller Object Creation Wizard – Advanced Settings
Page ......................................................................................... 470
17.12 Select Firmware Dialog Box ....................................................... 471
17.13 MP Series Controller Error Log Properties– Basic Tab ............... 473
17.14 MP Series Controller Error Log Properties – Advanced Tab ....... 475
17.15 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties– Basic Tab ....... 476
17.16 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 479
17.17 MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Basic Tab ........ 481
17.18 MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Advanced Tab . 483
17.19 MP Series Controller Current Input Properties – Basic Tab ........ 484
17.20 MP Series Controller Current Input Properties – Advanced Tab . 487
17.21 MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Basic Tab ........... 488
17.22 MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Advanced Tab .... 490
17.23 MP Series Controller Resistive Input Properties – Basic Tab ...... 491
17.24 MP Series Controller Resistive Input Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 494
17.25 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 495
17.26 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 497
17.27 MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Basic Tab ... 498
17.28 MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 500
17.29 MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties – Basic Tab 502
17.30 MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 505

13
17.31 MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties – Basic Tab ........ 506
17.32 MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties – Advanced Tab . 509
17.33 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Basic Tab ...... 510
17.34 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 513
17.35 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 514
17.36 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Basic Tab ........ 516
17.37 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Advanced Tab . 519
17.38 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Command Tab 520
17.39 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 522
17.40 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties - Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 525
17.41 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 526
17.42 MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties –
Basic Tab .................................................................................. 528
Advanced Tab .......................................................................... 531
Command Tab .......................................................................... 533
17.45 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Basic Tab ...... 535
17.46 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 538
17.47 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 539
17.48 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 541
17.49 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 544
17.50 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 545
17.51 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Basic Tab ...... 547
17.52 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 550
17.53 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 551
17.54 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Basic Tab ......... 553
17.55 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Advanced Tab .. 555
17.56 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Command Tab . 556
17.57 MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Basic Tab ..... 558
17.58 MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 560
17.59 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Basic Tab .......... 561
17.60 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Advanced Tab ... 563
17.61 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Command Tab .. 564
17.62 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Basic Tab .... 566
17.63 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 568

14
17.64 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 569
17.65 MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Basic Tab .......... 571
17.66 MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Advanced Tab ... 573
17.67 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 574
17.68 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab .......................................................................... 576
17.69 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 577
17.70 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 579
17.71 MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 580
17.72 MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab .......................................................................... 582
17.73 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 583
17.74 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 585
17.75 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 586
17.76 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 588
17.77 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 591
17.78 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Command
Tab ........................................................................................... 592
17.79 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 594
17.80 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab .......................................................................... 596
17.81 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties –
Command Tab .......................................................................... 597
17.82 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Basic Tab .. 599
17.83 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 600
17.84 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Alarm Settings
Tab ........................................................................................... 601
17.85 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 603
17.86 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties –
Advanced Tab .......................................................................... 607
17.87 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties – Alarm
Settings Tab ............................................................................. 609
17.88 MP Series Controller Schedule Properties – Basic Tab .............. 612
17.89 MP Series Controller Schedule Properties – Advanced Tab ....... 615
17.90 MP Series Controller Calendar Properties – Basic Tab ............... 616
17.91 MP Series Controller Calendar Properties – Advanced Tab ........ 617
17.92 MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties – Basic Tab ......... 618
17.93 MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties – Advanced Tab . 622

15
17.94 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Basic Tab ..... 623
17.95 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 626
17.96 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Inputs Tab .... 628
17.97 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Outputs Tab . 629
17.98 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Functions
Tab ........................................................................................... 630
17.99 MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Basic Tab ..... 631
17.100 MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Advanced
Tab ........................................................................................... 632
17.101 MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Functions
Tab ........................................................................................... 633
17.102 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Basic
Tab ........................................................................................... 634
17.103 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties –
Advanced Tab .......................................................................... 637
17.104 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Inputs
Tab ........................................................................................... 638
17.105 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Outputs
Tab ........................................................................................... 639
17.106 SmartX Sensor Properties – Basic Tab ...................................... 640
17.107 SmartX Sensor Properties – Advanced Tab ............................... 642
17.108 SmartX Sensor Object Properties – Basic Tab ........................... 643
17.109 SmartX Sensor Object Properties – Advanced Tab .................... 646
17.110 SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Basic Tab ............... 647
17.111 SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Advanced Tab ........ 649
17.112 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Basic Tab ........ 652
17.113 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Advanced Tab . 654
18 MP Series Controller Deep Technical Reference ......... 655

18.1 Dynamic IP Address Assignment .............................................. 657
18.1.1 Private IP Networks ................................................................. 657
18.1.2 Link-local Addresses ............................................................... 657
18.1.3 DHCP Server Assigned IP ....................................................... 658
18.1.4 Controller-assigned IP ............................................................. 658
19 MP Series Controller Troubleshooting ........................ 659

19.1 Device Custom Type Versions Do Not Match ............................ 661
19.1.1 Solution ................................................................................. 661
19.2 MP Series Controller Does Not Display in Device Discovery ....... 662
19.2.1 Solution .................................................................................. 662
19.3 Duplicate MP Series Controller Device IDs ................................. 663
19.3.1 Solution .................................................................................. 663
19.4 MP Series Controller Program Bindings Cyclic Dependency ...... 664
19.4.1 Solution .................................................................................. 664
19.5 MP Series Controller Program Execution Overrun ...................... 665
19.5.1 Solution .................................................................................. 665
19.6 MP Series Controller Device Already Hosted Message .............. 666
19.6.1 Solution .................................................................................. 666

16
19.7 Device Custom Types Do Not Match ........................................ 667
19.7.1 Solution .................................................................................. 667
19.8 Device Model Mismatch ............................................................ 668
19.8.1 Solution .................................................................................. 668
19.9 Unexpected Type Information ................................................... 669
19.9.1 Solution .................................................................................. 669
19.10 Device Address Bindings Limit .................................................. 670
19.10.1 Solution ................................................................................. 670

17
Reference
The Reference part contains conceptual information,

procedures, user interface descriptions and troubleshooting
information. If you want more information, see WebHelp or
the other EcoStruxure BMS guides.
1 MP Series Controller
Introduction
Topics
MP Series Controller Overview
MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards
MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support
Configuring MP Series Controller IP Network Settings
Discarding MP Series Controller IP Network Settings
Changes
Configuring Ethernet Port 2 on the SmartX Server
Creating an IP Network on the SmartX Server
Configuring a Shared IP Network for MP Series Controllers
Using WorkStation
MP Series Controller Networking Standards
MP Series Controller Network Topologies
Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller Network
Workflow
Before Hosting an MP Series Controller
EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP Series Controller
IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers
IP Address Settings for IP Communications
DHCP Server Options
IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover
1 MP Series Controller Introduction
1.1 MP Series Controller Overview

The MP Series controller is an IP-enabled, native BACnet field controller from
Schneider Electric. It is a highly flexible, open protocol device that is fully
programmable through the EcoStruxure Building Operation software for control and
supervision of equipment typically used in HVAC applications. Its mix of universal
I/O and intelligent SmartX sensor support allows for a wide-range of control
solutions.
1.1.1 MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards

The MP Series controller embraces open and IT standards. Support for IT
standards enables network configuration efficiency and monitoring capabilities,
while its native BACnet support provides interoperabililty with other BACnet
devices.
For more information, see section 1.2 “MP Series Controller Open and IT
Standards” on page 26.
1.1.2 MP Series Controller Types

The MP Series controllers include two overall model types, the MP-C with its
onboard I/O and the MP-V with its onboard I/O, an airflow sensor and a damper
actuator. Both model types are native BACnet/IP. As such, you can utilize them as
either standalone field controllers, or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS.
For more information, see section 2.1 “MP Series Controllers” on page 61.
1.1.3 MP Series Controller Management and

Communication
As a BACnet device, you can manage the MP Series controller using a BACnet
client that conforms to one of the BACnet Operator device profiles.
For more information, see section 3.1 “MP Series Controller Management and
Communication” on page 87.
1.1.4 MP Series Controller I/O Points

MP Series controllers offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match the majority
of application types. Most I/O points are onboard and highly flexible, so you can
configure them as inputs or outputs including Form A relays, high current relays,
triac and analog outputs. The SmartX sensor bus allows for additional remote I/O
and human interfaces such as a SmartX sensor with options that include a
touchscreen display.
For more information, see section 4.1 “MP Series Controller I/O Points” on page
119.

23
1.1.5 MP Series Controller Value Objects

You create one of the following values in an MP Series controller:
• BACnet analog value
• BACnet datetime value
• BACnet digital value
• BACnet string value
• BACnet multistate value
For more information, see section 5.1 “MP Series Controller Value Objects” on page
185.
1.1.6 Programming Languages for MP Series

Controllers
Unique to the industry, the MP-C provides both Script and Function Block
programming options. This flexibility assures that you have the best programming
method available for your application.
For more information, see section 6.1 “Programming Languages for MP Series
Controllers” on page 217.
1.1.7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend Logs for MP

Series Controllers
The MP Series controllers support local BACnet schedules, alarms, and trend logs
resulting in higher reliability, and greater engineering efficiency and performance
than field controllers relying on a supervising controller for schedules, alarms, and
trend logs.
For more information, see section 7.1 “Schedules for MP Series Controllers” on
page 225.
For more information, see section 7.4 “Alarms for MP Series Controllers” on page
228.
For more information, see section 7.10 “Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers” on
page 239.
1.1.8 SmartX Sensors

SmartX Sensors are a family of living space sensors designed for MP Series
controllers using the EcoStruxure Building Operation user interface. These sensors
use an RJ-45 sensor bus that provides communication and power from the MP
Series controller.
For more information, see section 8.1 “SmartX Sensors” on page 243.

24
1.1.9 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

The eCommission SmartX Controllers tool is a mobile commissioning tool for MP
Series controllers that is supported across all major OS platforms. It is designed for
the configuration, maintenance, and commissioning of local MP Series controllers
or daisy chained MP Series controllers.
For more information, see section 13.1 “eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool” on
page 329.
1.1.10 VAV Support and the MP Series Controller -

MP-V
The MP-V is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field controller
dedicated to supporting Variable Air Volume (VAV) Data applications. A VAV
terminal box provides a supply air stream at a constant temperature with a
modulated amount of air in order to serve a specified space.
For more information, see section 14.1 “Variable Air Volume Data Support and the
MP-V” on page 337.

25
1.2 MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards
1.2 MP Series Controller Open and IT

Standards
The MP Series controller embraces open and IT standards. Support for IT
standards enables network configuration efficiency and monitoring capabilities,
while its native BACnet support provides interoperabililty with other BACnet
devices.
When used with other EcoStruxure Building Operation components, such as
EcoStruxure BMS servers and SmartX IP controllers, the BACnet open protocol
handles all primary messaging for data exchange, device configuration, object
creation and deletion, property editing, and firmware updates. Many of these
BACnet functions are also available to third-party BACnet clients as indicated in the
MP Series Controller Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS). In
addition, you can leverage IT standards for IP address management, directory
services and monitoring. You do so by using the device configuration and
monitoring capabilities of common IT tools.
1.2.1 MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support

MP Series controllers utilize BACnet/IP, the fastest available BACnet transport, with
each device having its own IP address. BACnet/IP communications are always
enabled in MP Series controllers.
For more information, see section 1.3 “MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support” on
page 28.
1.2.2 MP Series Controller Networking Standards

MP Series controllers leverage networking standards. This makes IP address
assignment and management easy, and provides monitoring capabilities that are
compatible with standard network management tools.
For more information, see section 1.9 “MP Series Controller Networking Standards”
on page 37.
1.2.3 MP Series Controller Network Topologies

MP Series controllers provide a variety of topology options to design your network
for optimal cost and performance balance:
• Star
• Daisy chain
• RSTP
• Hybrid
For more information, see section 1.10 “MP Series Controller Network Topologies”
on page 38.

26
1.2 MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards
1.2.4 Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller

Network Workflow
Use this workflow to configure the SmartX server, so it functions as an isolated IP
network. Configuring the isolated network to use DHCP allows the SmartX server to
easily host a local network of MP Series controllers.
For more information, see section 1.11 “Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller
Network Workflow” on page 42.
1.2.5 Before Hosting an MP Series Controller

EcoStruxure BMS servers such as the SmartX AS-P server, SmartX AS-B server, or
Enterprise Server may host MP Series controllers. Before hosting an MP Series
controller, there are several different pre-conditions you should consider, however.
For more information, see section 1.12 “Before Hosting an MP Series Controller” on
page 44.
1.2.6 EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP Series

Controller
When EcoStruxure BMS servers such as the SmartX AS-P server, SmartX AS-B
server, or Enterprise Server host MP Series controllers, the server is responsible for
the full management of that controller including its programming.
For more information, see section 1.13 “EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP
Series Controller” on page 46.
1.2.7 IP Address Assignment for MP Series

Controllers
When the MP Series controller is powered up, it undergoes a process to determine
the IP address settings it needs for IP communication. This helps minimize the time
required for the controller to fully boot to normal operation.
For more information, see section 1.14 “ IP Address Assignment for MP Series

27
1.3 MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support

MP Series controllers utilize BACnet/IP, the fastest available BACnet transport, with
each device having its own IP address. BACnet/IP communications are always
enabled in MP Series controllers.
While MP Series controllers have 2 physical Ethernet ports, the second port can
only operate as a network switch. Therefore, MP Series controllers only have a
single MAC address that you can configure with one IP address.
1.3.1 Additional Functions

When used in EcoStruxure BMS, the MP Series controller is a BACnet device that
provides additional functions beyond the BACnet standard. Supported standard
BACnet objects and services are still available to all BACnet clients. However,
proprietary extensions to the standard are included that provide additional functions
not defined by the BACnet standard while still maintaining full BACnet compliance.
These additional functions include:
• Firmware updates
For more information, see section 3.11 “MP Series Controller Firmware
Management” on page 105.
• Script and function block programming code loading and modification
• Assignment of input and output electric types, conversions and channel
numbers
For more information, see section 4.1 “MP Series Controller I/O Points” on
page 119.
• SmartX sensor device objects and configuration
1.3.2 BACnet and IP Routing

While BACnet network ID numbers can be the same across an IP router, they must
be unique across a BACnet router. Typically if all SmartX servers are sharing a
common Building Management System backbone, the Ethernet Port 1 for each
SmartX server has the BACnet network ID set to 1, while each SmartX server has its
Ethernet Port 2 network ID set to a unique (throughout system) BACnet network ID.
For example, in a site with 5 SmartX servers, BACnet network numbers 1-4, 6-7,
2764-2767 are used and do not conflict since they are internetworked using the
SmartX server as a BACnet router. Servers 1-3 and 4-5 communicate without
conflict since only an IP router is used to route the network traffic and not a BACnet
router.

28
Continued
SmartX server Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 COM A COM B
name
Server 1 IP address: Mode: Dual IP Mode: MS/TP Mode: MS/TP

10.1.10.24
IP address: BACnet network BACnet network
BACnet network 10.110.210.1 number: 2764 number: 2765
number: 1
BACnet network
number: 2
Server 2 IP address: Mode: Dual IP Mode: MS/TP Mode: Disabled

10.1.10.43
IP address: BACnet network BACnet network
BACnet network 10.110.210.1 number: 2766 number: 2767
number: 1
BACnet network
number: 3
Server 3 IP address: Mode: Dual IP Mode: Modbus Mode: MS/TP

10.1.10.63 RTU
IP address: BACnet network
BACnet network 10.110.210.1 BACnet network number: 6
number: 1 number: N/A
BACnet network
number: 4
Server 4 IP address: Mode: Switch Mode: Modbus Mode: Disabled

192.9.2.54 RTU
IP address: N/A BACnet network
BACnet network BACnet network number: N/A
number: 1 BACnet network number: N/A
number: N/A
Server 5 IP address: Mode: Disabled Mode: MS/TP Mode: Disabled

192.9.2.55
IP address: N/A BACnet network BACnet network
BACnet network number: 7 number: N/A
number: 1 BACnet network
number: N/A

29
1.4 Configuring MP Series Controller IP Network Settings
1.4 Configuring MP Series Controller IP

Network Settings
You use the IP network settings to configure or re-configure the TCP/IP, BACnet IP
or Foreign Device settings in your MP Series controller.
Tip
Changes do not become effective until you click Activate changes in the IP
commands menu. Activating changes causes the MP Series controller to apply
the changes and then automatically perform a warm start.
page 28.
To configure MP Series controller IP network settings

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the MP Series controller
and then select System.
2. In the List View, click IP Network Settings.
3. On the File menu, click Properties.
4. Click the Basic tab.
Continued on next page

30
5. Edit the Basic properties.

Property Description
Reliability Specifies whether the IP and connected

network are reliable as far as the BACnet
device can determine and, if not, why.
This is a read-only property.
Changes pending Specifies whether the configuration

settings in the IP network map to the
current configuration settings. A value of
False indicates that the configuration
settings reflect the current port
configuration information. This is a read-
only property.
Command status Requests that the IP network perform

various actions including:
• Idle
• Discard changes
• Renew foreign device registration
• Renew DHCP port lease
IP assignment Select either Static or Dyamic to specify

the method you wish to use to assign the
IP address to the MP Series controller.
For more information, see section 1.14 “
IP Address Assignment for MP Series
IP address Type the IP address of this IP network.
Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask for this network.
Default gateway Type the IP address of the default

gateway for this network.
IP port number Enter an IP port number, or accept the

default setting of 47,808 which is the
default for all MP Series controllers.
IP mode Displays the BACnet IP mode of this IP

network including:
• Normal: The device is not operating
as a foreign device over this IP
network.
• Foreign: The device is operating as a
foreign device over this IP network.
BBMD address Type the BBMD address the device

should use to register as a foreign device
when IP mode is specified as Foreign.
Subscription lifetime Enter the number of seconds the device

waits before renewing its subscription
with the BBMD.

31
Continued
6. Click the Advanced tab.

7. Edit the Advanced properties.
Object ID Displays the BACnet object type and

instance number of the device.
BACnet name View the name of the BACnet object or

type a new name to change the name.
BACnet type Displays the type, such as device or

analog value.
8. Click OK.

32
1.5 Discarding MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Changes
1.5 Discarding MP Series Controller IP

Network Settings Changes
You can discard any IP network settings changes you make in your MP Series
controller before they become effective.
Tip
Changes do not become effective until you click Activate changes in the IP
commands menu. Activating changes causes the MP Series controller to apply
the changes and then automatically perform a warm start.
page 28.
To discard MP Series controller IP network settings changes

3. In the Actions menu, point to IP commands and then click Discard
Changes.

33
1.6 Configuring Ethernet Port 2 on the SmartX Server
1.6 Configuring Ethernet Port 2 on the

SmartX Server
You configure Ethernet port 2 on the SmartX server so it functions as an isolated IP
network with DHCP server functionality.
For more information, see the Device Administrator topic on WebHelp.
To configure Ethernet port 2 on the SmartX server

1. In Device Administrator, in the View menu, click Network settings.
2. In the Properties pane, click Ethernet 2 Configuration.
3. In the Ethernet 2 mode box, select Dual IP.
4. In the DHCP mode box, select Server.
Note
This is the simplest configuration for MP Series controllers configured
with dynamic IP. In this mode, the SmartX server DHCP server
automatically assigns IP addresses in the range 10.110.210.2 to
10.11.201.254 to MP Series controllers. For more information, see
section 1.14 “ IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers” on
page 49.
5. Click Ok to save the changes to the SmartX server configuration.

6. In the View menu, click Network settings.
7. Click Ethernet 2 Configuration.
Notice the current IP address will be 10.110.210.1.
8. Exit Device Administrator.

34
1.7 Creating an IP Network on the SmartX Server
1.7 Creating an IP Network on the SmartX

Server
You create an IP network on the SmartX server to allow it to easily host a local
network of MP Series controllers.
Tip
Be sure to create an IP network in conjunction with configuring the Ethernet port
2 on the SmartX server.
For more information, see the Device Administrator topic on WebHelp.
To create an IP network on the SmartX server

1. Ensure that you log on to the SmartX server using an account with authorized
engineering privileges.
2. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, select the BACnet Interface.
3. In the File menu, click New and IP network.
4. In the Naming the object page, enter a name for the new IP network and
click Next.
5. In IP Network basic settings page, in the Network ID box, enter a unique
network ID not currently used in the system.
Note
Because the SmartX server is a BACnet router, ensure that the
network ID numbers are unique and different. While network ID
numbers can be the same across an IP router, they must be unique
across a BACnet router. For more information, see section 1.3 “MP
Series Controller BACnet/IP Support” on page 28.
6. In the IP address box, enter 10.110.210.1.

For more information, see section 1.6 “ Configuring Ethernet Port 2 on the
SmartX Server” on page 34.
7. In the IP port number box, ensure that you accept the default setting of
47,808.
This is the default setting for all MP Series controllers.
8. Click Create.
Now, when you connect new MP Series controllers with the default dynamic IP
settings to the SmartX server Ethernet port 2, they are automatically assigned
unique IP addresses.

35
1.8 Configuring a Shared IP Network for MP Series Controllers Using WorkStation
1.8 Configuring a Shared IP Network for MP

Series Controllers Using WorkStation
You configure the Ethernet port 2 on the SmartX server to provide compatible IP
address settings that allow MP Series controllers to utilize a shared network.
page 28.
To configure a shared IP network for MP Series controllers

using WorkStation
1. Using Device Administrator, connect to the SmartX server using the USB or
Ethernet port 1.
2. On the View menu, click Network settings.
3. Click Ethernet 2 Configuration.
4. In the Ethernet 2 mode box, click Enabled (Switch).
Note
You must configure a compatible IP address setting to utilize the
shared network. If the shared network has a DHCP server, then MP
Series controllers set to Dynamic IP do not require reconfiguration.
For more information, see section 1.14 “ IP Address Assignment for
MP Series Controllers” on page 49.
5. Click Ok to save the changes to the SmartX server configuration.

6. Exit Device Administrator.
7. Using WorkStation, log on to the SmartX server using an account with
authorized engineering privileges.
8. Configure the BACnet Interface for the SmartX server.
This automatically creates the necessary BACnet/IP network utilizing the IP
address of the SmartX server Ethernet 1 port. The default network port of
47808 default setting is also the default setting for all MP Series controllers
9. Click Create.

36
1.9 MP Series Controller Networking Standards
1.9 MP Series Controller Networking

Standards
MP Series controllers leverage networking standards. This makes IP address
assignment and management easy, and provides monitoring capabilities that are
compatible with standard network management tools.
MP Series controllers support the following communication technologies:
• IP addressing
• BACnet IP communications
• DHCP for rapid deployment
• Auto-IP (Link-Local) which is comparable to Microsoft's Automatic Private IP
Addressing (APIPA)
Note
With Auto-IP, you can use a dynamic IP configuration address without having to
pick a specific address. The IP address is automatically selected in the Auto-IP v4
address range between 169.254.1.0, and 169.254.254.255. For more
information, see section 1.14 “ IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers”
on page 49.

37
1.10 MP Series Controller Network Topologies
1.10 MP Series Controller Network

Topologies
MP Series controllers provide a variety of topology options to design your network
for optimal cost and performance balance:
• Star
• Daisy chain
• RSTP
• Hybrid
The following topology diagrams are representative and do not necessarily reflect
actual numbers and device layouts. Ultimately, all included devices are hosted by a
server.
Tip
If possible, the ideal here is to keep the hop length distances equal since varying
hop lengths provoke propagation issues.
1.10.1 Star
A star topology connects all nodes such as controllers, servers, and clients to a
central hub or switch. Star is the most reliable topology because any network cable
or device can fail without impacting communication with the other devices.
However, star can often require longer lengths of cable and more network
equipment like switches that produce additional costs.
In the example, MP Series controllers and the parent SmartX server are connected
to a network switch to create a star topology
Figure: Star topology

38
1.10.2 Daisy Chain

A daisy chain topology connects all nodes such as controllers, servers, and clients
in a linear series. Daisy chain is often the easiest and most cost effective topology to
deploy since it may require less cable and no additional networking components. A
daisy chain network is not as reliable as a star or an RSTP network because any
cable or device failure causes all devices downstream from the failure to lose
communication to all upstream devices.
In the example, installation time and cost are reduced by daisy-chaining multiple MP
Series controllers together and connecting them to the second Ethernet port of the
SmartX server using only SmartX IP controllers and servers.
Figure: Daisy chain topology
1.10.3 RSTP
A Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) topology connects all nodes such as
controllers, servers, and clients in a ring with each node in series. RSTP offers
similar ease of deployment and cost effectiveness as the daisy chain topology, but
with the added benefit of being able to survive a single point of failure without losing
communication with any node.
Multiple failures result in a group of offline devices between the first and last failure
points within the ring. If greater availability is required during multiple failure
conditions for critical devices, consider using a star topology for those devices.
While RSTP can require less cabling than a star topology, it does require a switch
with RSTP support. As a result, deploying RSTP networks can be more expensive
than deploying daisy chain networks.
In the example, a daisy chain deployment is enhanced by adding an RSTP capable
switch to the network and wiring the daisy chain back to the switch to create a ring.
To minimize the amount of cabling required, you can route your cables as shown so
that the Ethernet cable segments go to every other device in the series.

39
Figure: RSTP topology
Note
RSTP functionality as specified in IEEE Std 802.1DTM – 2004 (IEEE Standard for
Local and metropolitan area networks Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges) is
supported in the MP Series controller.
1.10.4 Hybrid
A Hybrid topology combines two or more of the supported topologies like star,
daisy chain or RSTP in the network design. Network designs can be more flexible
and optimized by combining topologies to accomplish the following:
• Help meet specified cost and reliability targets
• Overcome challenges with the physical routing of the cable
• Leverage existing infrastructure
Examples of hybrid topologies include two or more interconnected star networks or
a daisy chain network with a switch in the middle starring out to other nodes as
shown.

40
Figure: Hybrid topology

41
1.11 Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller Network Workflow
1.11 Configure an Isolated MP Series

Controller Network Workflow
Use this workflow to configure the SmartX server, so it functions as an isolated IP
network. Configuring the isolated network to use DHCP allows the SmartX server to
easily host a local network of MP Series controllers.
Related information can be found in the sections following this workflow.
Figure: Configure isolated MP Series controller network workflow
Connect to the SmartX Server

In Device Administrator, connect to the SmartX server using either the USB port or
the Ethernet port 1.
For more information, see the Connecting to a SmartX Server Using the USB
Device Port topic on WebHelp.
For more information, see the Connecting to a SmartX Server Using the IP Network
topic on WebHelp.
Configure Ethernet port 2 for DHCP Server mode

Configure Ethernet port 2 on the SmartX server for DHCP Server mode.
In this mode, the SmartX server DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses in
the range 10.110.210.2 to 10.11.201.254 to MP Series controllers.
For more information, see section 1.6 “ Configuring Ethernet Port 2 on the SmartX
Server” on page 34.

42
1.11 Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller Network Workflow
Log on to the SmartX Server

In WorkStation, log on to the SmartX server using an account that has authorized
engineering privileges.
For more information, see the Logging on to WorkStation as an EcoStruxure
Building Operation User topic on WebHelp.
Create the IP network

Create the IP network in a BACnet Interface for the SmartX server using the IP
address of Ethernet port 2.
For more information, see section 1.7 “Creating an IP Network on the SmartX
Server” on page 35.
Note
When you connect new MP Series controllers to the SmartX server Ethernet 2
port, they will automatically be assigned unique IP addresses.
Discover the controllers

You can discover MP Series controllers with the Device Discovery view of the
server.
For more information, see section 3.5 “Device Discovery for MP Series Controllers”
on page 99.

43
1.12 Before Hosting an MP Series Controller

EcoStruxure BMS servers such as the SmartX AS-P server, SmartX AS-B server, or
Enterprise Server may host MP Series controllers. Before hosting an MP Series
controller, there are several different pre-conditions you should consider, however.
• Is the application pre-configured in the server database?
– Does it include a pre-assigned BACnet ID
– Is the application field-deployed to the controller
• Does the controller database have the BACnet ID assigned
The following table shows all the pre-conditional scenarios for hosting an MP Series
controller.
Server Controller Upload
database database needed
after
hosting
Option Pre- BACnet ID Field-based BACnet ID

configured assigned deploy assigned
1 – – – – x
2 – – – x x
3 x – – – x
4 x – – x x
5 x x – – x
6a x x – x x
7 x – x – x
8 x – x x x
9 x x x – x
10 x x x x x
a
The BACnet IDs assigned in the server and the controller must match. If they do not, you
will need to resolve this mis-match before proceeding. Typically, changing the controller
BACnet ID is less disruptive than changing the server database application.
Consider the following when finding the device in the Device Discovery view:
• For options 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9, Device Discovery places the controller in the ID
initialization required folder.
• For option 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10, Device Discovery places the controller in the
network folder for its network number.

44
Figure: Device discovery view

Consider the following when initializing the BACnet ID of controllers that currently do
not have the BACnet ID initialized:
• For options 1, 3 and 7, you must manually initialize the BACnet ID of the
controller using the Initialize ID command in the Device Discovery view. For
more information, see section 2.14 “Initializing the BACnet ID of an MP Series
Controller” on page 79.
• For options 5 and 9, the hosting process automatically initializes the BACnet ID
before associating the controller with the BACnet ID of the pre-configured
device proxy. (See the information that follows for more details).
Consider the following when hosting an MP Series controller:
• For options 1 and 2, the controller is not pre-configured in the server database.
With both these options, the hosting process creates a device proxy in the
server and assigns the BACnet ID from the controller. With option 1, you must
first manually initialize the BACnet ID.
• For options 3, 4, 7 and 8, the controller is pre-configured in the server
database without a pre-assigned BACnet ID. With all four of these options, the
hosting process assigns the device proxy BACnet ID in the server using the
BACnet ID set in the controller. With option 3 and 7, you must first initialize the
BACnet ID.
• For options 5 and 9, the controller is pre-configured in the server database with
a preassigned BACnet ID. With both of these options, the hosting process
assigns the BACnet ID in the controller with the BACnet ID assigned in the
server.
• For options 6 and 10, the controller is pre-configured and both the server and
controller databases have a preassigned BACnet ID. With both of these
options, the hosting process does not alter the BACnet ID in either the
controller or the server provided the BACnet ID is the same in both. If the
BACnet ID is not same, you must ensure that the BACnet ID is resolved before
hosting.

45
1.13 EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP Series Controller
1.13 EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP

Series Controller
When EcoStruxure BMS servers such as the SmartX AS-P server, SmartX AS-B
server, or Enterprise Server host MP Series controllers, the server is responsible for
the full management of that controller including its programming.
With the hosting process, the ultimate goal is to ensure the following:
• The MP Series controller and its database contain the same BACnet ID
• The MP Series controller and its database are associated
• The MP Series controller and its database are fully synchronized for all
deployable objects and properties
For a server to host an MP Series controller, the controller must have an assigned
BACnet ID. By default, the BACnet ID is not assigned in the controller.
There are several different ways you can assign the BACnet ID:
• By using the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool
For more information, see section 13.1 “eCommission SmartX Controllers
Tool” on page 329.
• By hosting a device that is pre-configured in the server database along with the
BACnet ID
For more information, see section 1.12 “Before Hosting an MP Series
Controller” on page 44.
• By using Device Discovery
For more information, see section 3.5 “Device Discovery for MP Series
1.13.1 Controller Hosting

You can host a controller using either manual hosting or Device Discovery. Device
Discovery and its drag-and-drop process leverages the list of BACnet devices that
the system can automatically discover.
To perform create and delete or read and write operations in the MP Series
controller, you should be sure to pair your WorkStation client with an EcoStruxure
Building Operation server. By itself, you cannot perform these operation in
WorkStation. You can only create and delete objects in the MP Series controller
using the host EcoStruxure Building Operation server. The MP Series controller only
recognizes that if the BACnet address of the requester is not its host server, it will
not permit a create and delete operation. For instance, it cannot differentiate
between third-party devices and (non-hosting) EcoStruxure Building Operation
servers. This restriction ensures that MP Series controller application engineering is
fully managed by EcoStruxure BMS and can leverage efficiencies provided with
User Defined Types.

46
Tip
In order to differentiate between BACnet device objects located in a BACnet
device and those located in an EcoStruxure BMS server, you can add the
Executed by column in the List View of the Application folder. For more
information, see the BACnet Device Object Indicator – Executed By topic on
WebHelp.
1.13.2 BACnet Interface

In WorkStation, you create a BACnet interface at the SmartX server level that
creates a BACnet/IP network by default.
For more information, see the Creating a BACnet Interface topic on WebHelp.
You can then perform a variety of tasks including the following:
• Creating the MP Series controller using the device creation wizard, or use
device discovery instead
• Creating the MP Series controller points, values, and programs, and manage
trends, schedules, and alarms
• Downloading the objects created in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
database to the MP Series controller
Tip
In the absence of a physical MP Series controller, you can create objects offline.
In this case, you then download the database once a physical device is
introduced to the system and associated with the previously created MP Series
controller.
Figure: MP Series controllers in the System Tree pane

47
For more information, see section 2.13 “Configure MP Series Controller Workflow”
on page 76.
1.13.3 BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)

Restrictions
The EcoStruxure Building Operation WorkStation complies with the BACnet
Operator Workstation (B-OWS). However, there are a number of restrictions that
you should be aware of:
• When an MP Series controller is hosted, it only allows you to create and delete
objects within its hosting EcoStruxure BMS server.
You can still modify object properties with the notable exceptions of the device
ID and system units.
• When an MP Series controller is not hosted, it does not prevent you from
creating and deleting BACnet objects.
• Restrictions apply to all third-party B-OWS as well as EcoStruxure BMS
servers that are not hosting the MP Series controller.
You cannot execute device restart (warm and cold start) and system
communication (enable, disable, disable initiation) comands.
• The eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool operates under the same
restrictions as any other third-party B-OWS device.
You cannot perform a field (that is, a bottom-up) deploy since the tool cannot
create the necessary file objects. For more information, see section 2.9
“Performing a Field Deploy for an MP Series Controller Application” on page
72.

48
1.14 IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers
1.14 IP Address Assignment for MP Series

Controllers
For more information, see section 1.15 “IP Address Settings for IP
Communications” on page 51.
1.14.1 Methods for Assigning IP Addresses

There are two different methods for assigning IP addresses:
• Static: manually assigned
• Dynamic: automatically assigned
Note
IP addresses are persistent. Dynamic IP addresses can change automatically
without manual intervention.
Static IP Addressing
With static IP addressing, you manually assign IP addresses to the MP Series
controller in either of two ways:
• Using the IP Network Settings object
For more information, see section 1.4 “Configuring MP Series Controller IP
Network Settings” on page 30.
• Using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool
For more information, see section 13.1 “eCommission SmartX Controllers
Tool” on page 329.
If MP Series controllers use static IP addressing, as long as you set the Ethernet 2
port to Static IP, the SmartX server DHCP server always assigns the 10.110.210.1
address to Ethernet port 2.
Dynamic IP Addressing
When an MP Series controller is configured for dynamic IP addressing (default
setting), the IP address is assigned centrally (and automatically) by a server or
locally by the controller. To avoid IP address conflicts on the network, the IP
assignment defaults to dynamic in the MP Series controller. IP addresses assigned
using the dynamic IP process are managed and changed automatically based on
network conditions, server settings, or by manual administrative actions.
Dynamic IP addressing assigns an IP address to a controller using several different
methods and priorities. For more information, see section 18.1 “Dynamic IP
Address Assignment” on page 657.

49
1.14 IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers
1.14.2 DHCP Server Options

You can use several DHCP server options with MP Series controllers. First, you
should ensure that the DHCP server is able to receive DCHP broadcasts from the
controllers. Then, you should establish that the DHCP server resides on either the
same network segment, or an IP Router with a DHCP relay agent enabled to
forward the broadcast across segments.
For more information, see section 1.16 “DHCP Server Options ” on page 53.
1.14.3 IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover

An IP address conflict occurs when two devices on the same local network
segment (physical or wireless) claim to have the same IP address.
For more information, see section 1.17 “IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover”
on page 56.

50
1.15 IP Address Settings for IP Communications
1.15 IP Address Settings for IP

Communications
This process depends on whether the controller has previously been configured
with a static IP address, subnet (and gateway if required). If so, IP communication
attempts to use these settings. If there is a conflict, such as another device on the
network attempting to use the same IP address, the MP controller failsover to an
address in the Auto IP range and maintains this address until the controller is
rebooted. For more information, see section 1.17 “IP Address Conflict Detection
and Failover” on page 56.
If no static address has been configured, the MP controller initially takes an address
in the Auto IP range before attempting to discover a DHCP server. Subsequently,
the controller negotiates a lease for DHCP assigned IP settings. If a DHCP offer is
made from a DHCP server, the controller drops the previous Auto IP and begins to
the use the assigned DHCP assigned IP settings. For more information, see section
1.16 “DHCP Server Options ” on page 53.
If no offer is received from a DHCP server, the controller continues to use the Auto
IP address and continues its attempt to discover a DHCP server. The controller
then takes a DHCP assigned IP at such time as it is offered (for example, if a DHCP
server is introduced to the network after the controller is operational).
On all subsequent restarts of the controller, this process is repeated. Because of
the way in which the server manages DHCP leases, the MP controller is assigned
the same DHCP assigned address it held prior to the restart.
The illustration that follows displays the initial IP address settings process for the MP
Series controller.

51
1.15 IP Address Settings for IP Communications
Figure: Initial IP address assignment for MP Series controllers

52
1.16 DHCP Server Options

You can use several DHCP server options with MP Series controllers. First, you
should ensure that the DHCP server is able to receive DCHP broadcasts from the
controllers. Then, you should establish that the DHCP server resides on either the
same network segment, or an IP Router with a DHCP relay agent enabled to
forward the broadcast across segments.
The following DHCP server options are supported with MP Series controllers:
• SmartX AS-P server or SmartX AS-B server with DHCP on a local network
• Router or switch with DHCP on a local network
• Computer with DHCP on a local network
• DHCP server of any type on a remote network using a relay agent
Note
These options are topology independent. A router or switch or a computer on a
local network are similar since both involve a local network connection. Be sure to
locate only one of these configurations on a network segment at the same time,
however. From a network management view, it is not desirable to have more than
1 DHCP server assigning addresses and responding to requests.
1.16.1 SmartX AS-P Server or SmartX AS-B Server

with DHCP on a Local Network
A SmartX AS-P server or SmartX AS-B server can function as a basic DHCP Server.
The built-in DHCP server assigns routable IP addresses within the range of
addresses from 10.110.210.2 to 10.11.201.254. This DHCP server only manages
DHCP clients connected to Ethernet port 2. As a result, you should ensure Ethernet
port 2 is configured as a separate network (not as switch) in order to enable the
DHCP server. For more information, see section 1.7 “Creating an IP Network on the
SmartX Server” on page 35.

53
Figure: SmartX AS-P server or SmartX AS-B server with DHCP
1.16.2 Router or Switch with DHCP on a Local

Network
Some network switches and router have built-in DHCP server functions you can
enable to provide standard management capabilities.
Figure: Router or switch with DHCP
1.16.3 Computer with DHCP on a Local Network

Microsoft Windows Server, for example, includes a DHCP service you can enable to
offer a standard set of management capabilities.

54
Figure: Computer with DHCP
1.16.4 DHCP Server on a Remote Network Using a

Relay Agent
A relay agent is any service that forwards DHCP packets between clients and
servers. You use relay agents to forward requests and replies between clients and
servers when they are not on the same physical subnet.
Figure: DHCP server on a remote network

55
1.17 IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover
1.17 IP Address Conflict Detection and

Failover
An IP address conflict occurs when two devices on the same local network
segment (physical or wireless) claim to have the same IP address.
Since dynamic IP assignment mitigates IP conflicts as part of the protocol, such
problems are usually limited to networks with static IP assignments.
1.17.1 Failover and IP Address Reassignment

If the MP Series controller detects an IP conflict while assigned a static IP address,
it fails over to AutoIP. This failover allows you to rediscover the controller and
reassign an appropriate static IP address. You do so by using any of the following
methods:
• Temporarily reconfigure the IP network of the host server to an IP in the AutoIP
range to discover and correct the IP address
• Connect an additional Enterprise server to the network with a BACnet IP
network configured in the AutoIP range to discover and correct the controller's
IP address
• Connect eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to the network using an IP
address configured in the AutoIP range to discover and correct the controller's
IP address
• Connect eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to the MP Series controller
using the eCommission Bluetooth Adapter on any SmartX Sensor connected
directly to the controller to discover and correct the controller's IP address
1.17.2 MP-C Add-on Display

The MP-C device display is an add-on module consisting of an LCD display and
keys that enable manual override control of analog and digital outputs. It shows the
current IP settings used by the MP Series controller, as well as firmware versions of
both the CPU and I/O boards.
Typically, the add-on display retains the static parameters for the controller.
However, if the device is then switched to Auto after the entry of these parameters,
the display shows either the DHCP or Auto-IP address once the settings have been
saved or committed. This usually includes a short cycle of the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP-C device add-on display

56
1.17 IP Address Conflict Detection and Failover
Note
With the add-on display module, you can manually override the outputs for
testing, commissioning, and maintenance of equipment. The override
configuration is readable through user interfaces, such as EcoStruxure Building
Operation WorkStation, enabling more precise monitoring and control. For more
information, see the Output Override Function topic on WebHelp.
During an I/O board restart, the counter input values you see on the add-on display
module, may reset and cannot be restored to any other value than zero. As a result,
you should be aware that the value of the display counter inputs may not reflect the
total count held by the counter value of the EcoStruxure BMS server counter object.
The purpose of the counter value in the display is to allow the technician to verify the
count that increments during I/O checkout or diagnostic investigation. It is not to
provide an absolute value inclusive of all historical counts.

57
2 MP Series Controller Creation
and Configuration
Topics
MP Series Controllers
Creating an MP Series Controller
Replacing an MP Series Controller
Deleting an MP Series Controller
Renewing DHCP
MP Series Controller Models
MP Series Controller Memory
MP Series Controller Reset Modes
Performing a Field Deploy for an MP Series Controller
Application
Adding an IP Address to the White List in an MP Series
Controller
MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module
Configuring Terminals on the Onboard I/O Module
Configure MP Series Controller Workflow
Initializing the BACnet ID of an MP Series Controller
Changing an MP Series Controller Device ID
MP Series Controller References and Device ID Changes
MP Series Controller Standard Objects
Resetting MP Series Controller Type Information
2 MP Series Controller Creation and Configuration
2.1 MP Series Controllers

The MP Series controllers include two overall model types, the MP-C with its
onboard I/O and the MP-V with its onboard I/O, an airflow sensor and a damper
actuator. Both model types are native BACnet/IP. As such, you can utilize them as
either standalone field controllers, or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS.
2.1.1 MP Series Controller Models

There are five MP-C models offering a flexible mix of I/O point types to suit a wide
range of HVAC applications. By contrast, there are two MP-V models that integrate
a controller, a damper actuator, and an airflow sensor in a single package
dedicated for VAV applications.
For more information, see section 2.6 “MP Series Controller Models” on page 67.
2.1.2 MP Series Controller Memory

MP Series controllers have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
For more information, see section 2.7 “MP Series Controller Memory” on page 69.
2.1.3 MP Series Controller Reset Modes

MP Series controllers can be directed to different reset/restart modes depending on
how long the reset button is pressed. These reset/restart modes can affect the
retention of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the
variables.
For more information, see section 2.8 “MP Series Controller Reset Modes” on page
70.
2.1.4 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module

The MP Series controller features both onboard I/O and a built-in power supply
designed to accommodate 24 VAC (MP-C and MP-V) or 24-30 VDC (MP-C) input
power. The power supply is based on a half-wave rectified, non-isolated design,
complemented by electronic protection components for transient and overload
protection and EMC compliance.
For more information, see section 2.11 “MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module”
on page 74.

61
2.1.5 Configure MP Series Controller Workflow

After you physically install the MP Series controller, you then use WorkStation to
fully configure and program the device.
For more information, see section 2.13 “Configure MP Series Controller Workflow”
on page 76.
2.1.6 MP Series Controller Standard Objects

Standard objects are collections of objects that are stored and executed on the
server, rather than the controller. You may find them useful in expanding the logical
control application with supporting server objects that do not reside or execute in
the controller.
For more information, see section 2.17 “MP Series Controller Standard Objects” on
page 82.

62
2.2 Creating an MP Series Controller

You create an MP Series controller when you want to create a new device on the
network.
For more information, see section 2 “MP Series Controller Creation and
Configuration” on page 59.
To create an MP Series controller

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the BACnet Interface and
then select the IP network where you want to create an MP Series controller.
2. On the File menu, point to New and then click the MP Series model you want
to create.
3. In the Create Object wizard, in the Name box, type a name for the MP
Series controller.
4. In the Description box, type a description for the MP Series controller.
5. Click Next.
6. In the BACnet basic settings page, click Download to BACnet device.
Enter an Instance ID if you know it, or leave this blank if you want to associate
the ID with the physical device after the object has been created.
Use the Associate with device command to perform this association.
When you do so, you type the BACnet instance number of the external
BACnet device that you want to associate with the device. After you complete
the procedure, the device is then associated with the external BACnet device.
For more information, see the Associating a BACnet Instance Number with a
Device topic on WebHelp.
7. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the device. Do not type a
name if you want a name to be assigned for you.
8. Select Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of an object in
the BACnet device.
9. Click Create.

63
2.3 Replacing an MP Series Controller
2.3 Replacing an MP Series Controller

If an MP Series controller fails, you physically replace the device and connect a new
one (TBD).
To replace an MP Series controller

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, select the defective MP Series
controller.
2. On the File menu, select Properties.
4. Make a note of the IP address and BACnet device ID.
5. Physically remove the defective MP Series controller and then connect and
turn on the replacement unit.
6. Using WorkStation, discover the new device and associate it with the existing
device object.
For more information, see section 3.5 “Device Discovery for MP Series
7. If the defective device was on a network without a DHCP server, enter the
defective device IP address and BACnet device ID in the replacement device
using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool.
This operation associates the replacement device with its logical
representation in EcoStruxure BMS.
8. Perform a database download.
For more information, see the Downloading the Contents of a BACnet Device
topic on WebHelp.
Tip
If you need the replacement device to maintain all runtime and log
values of the original MP Series controller (assuming that the original
was not dead), you may use a BACnet backup and restore operation
in the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to accomplish this. For
more information, see the BACnet Backup and Restore topic on
WebHelp.

64
2.4 Deleting an MP Series Controller
2.4 Deleting an MP Series Controller

You remove an MP Series controller from the software environment by selecting
and deleting that device.
page 28.
To delete an MP Series controller

then select the IP network.
2. Select the MP Series controller.
3. On the Edit menu, click Delete.
4. In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Yes.
Important
When you delete an MP Series, its bindings are also deleted.

65
2.5 Renewing DHCP
2.5 Renewing DHCP

You renew DHCP in order to force the MP Series controller to renew its DHCP lease
with the DHCP server.
To renew DHCP in the MP Series controller

3. In the Actions menu, point to IP commands and then click Renew DHCP.
Tip
Renewing DHCP does not become effective until you click Activate
changes in the IP commands menu. Activating changes causes
the MP Series controller to apply the changes and then automatically
perform a warm start.

66
2.6 MP Series Controller Models

There are five MP-C models offering a flexible mix of I/O point types to suit a wide
range of HVAC applications. By contrast, there are two MP-V models that integrate
a controller, a damper actuator, and an airflow sensor in a single package
dedicated for VAV applications.
Figure: MP-C and MP-V devices

Both the MP-C and MP-V include varying inputs, outputs, and other features.
Table: MP-C and MP-V Features

Model Inputs Outputs Other Features
MP-C-15A 8 Universal I/O Ub 6 Triac 1 High power MP-C contains the

type relay following ports:
- Two 10/100
MP-C-18A 10 Universal I/O Ub 4 Triac 3 Relay 1 Ethernet
type High power relay
- One USB host port
MP-C-18B 10 Universal I/O Ub 8 Triac (not used)
type - One USB device
port (not used)
MP-C-24A 16 Universal I/O Ub 4 Relay outputs
type - One SmartX sensor
port
4 Universal I/O Uc
type (Sensor bus that
uses RS-485
MP-C-36A 20 Universal I/O Ub 8 Relay outputs proprietary
type communications with
a 24VDC SmartX
8 Universal I/O Uc sensor power supply
type (2W) supporting up
to 4 sensors)

67
Continued
Model Inputs Outputs Other Features
MP-V-7A 3 Universal 3 Triac MP-V contains the

following ports: --
2 Analog Two 10/100 Ethernet
MP-V-9A 4 Universal 3 Triac - One USB host port
(not used)
2 Analog
- One USB device
port (not used)
- One SmartX sensor
port (A sensor bus
that uses RS-485
proprietary
communications with
a 24VDC SmartX
sensor power supply
(2W) supporting up
to 4 sensors)

68
2.7 MP Series Controller Memory
2.7 MP Series Controller Memory

MP Series controllers have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
You can manually back up or restore MP Series controllers to a storage location on
a PC or network. For more information, see the BACnet Backup and Restore topic
on WebHelp.
When MP Series controllers are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the configuration data
automatically resides in the parent EcoStruxure BMS server. The EcoStruxure
Building Operation database and the MP Series controller database are
synchronized to ensure there is always one backup available that can be used to
restore the controller memory. Scheduled backups can provide additional
protection against application and data loss. In addition, device-specific values (for
example, VAV air flow balancing data) are duplicated in the parent server to facilitate
device replacement scenarios.

69
2.8 MP Series Controller Reset Modes

MP Series controllers can be directed to different reset/restart modes depending on
how long the reset button is pressed. These reset/restart modes can affect the
retention of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the
variables.
Figure: Location of the reset button on different MP Series controller models

You can use a straigthened segment of a paper clip or a similar tool to press the
reset button.
Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description
Warm start Press and release the reset button in less

than 5 seconds.
Device Firmware Upgrade (DFU) Press and release the reset button 3 times
within 5 to 9 seconds.
Cold start Press and hold the reset button for more
than 5 seconds but less than 9 seconds.
Reset IP to DHCP with failover to Auto-IP Press and hold the reset button for 10 to 19
seconds.
Reset to factory condition Press and hold the reset button for 20 to 29
seconds.
Secure erase Press and hold the reset button for 30 to 39

seconds.

70
Continued
Mode Description
Cancel reset action Press and hold the reset button for more
than 40 seconds and then release the
button.
This action cancels the reset request that
would be initiated by any of the shorter
button press durations.
Tip
If the MP-C is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module, a count-up timer
and progress bar are displayed to assist in reset selection. There is also a reset
mode indicator that lets you know which reset occurs if you release at that time.
2.8.1 Retain Levels for Variables

Variables have a configurable retain level, which controls if the value of the variable
is retained after a restart of the MP Series controller. There are three retain levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start
The following table lists what is retained after a warm start or cold start based on
the configured retain level.
Table: Retained Variable Values Depending on Restart Mode and Retain Level
Restart mode Retain level: Retain level: Retain level:
No Warm start Cold start
Warm start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by a value configured by a
user. Values set by user. Values set by
an application are an application are
retained. retained.
Cold start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by a value configured by a
user. Values set by user. Values set by
an application are an application are
lost. retained.
a
Default value is the value the variable gets when it is created.
For more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.

71
2.9 Performing a Field Deploy for an MP Series Controller Application
2.9 Performing a Field Deploy for an MP

Series Controller Application
You field deploy an MP Series controller to facilitate I/O checkout and device
commissioning. You can compile the objects in an MP Series controller application
in an image file that you can upload and deploy to controllers using the
eCommission SmartX Controllers tool. The image file contains a format that can be
read and understood by other MP Series controllers. It is used primarily to facilitate
I/O checkout and commissioning before the network infrastructure and servers are
in place.
Note
The image file may not contain the complete collection of objects visible in the
Application folder of the MP Series controller on the EcoStruxure BMS server.
Also, if the image file is created from an MP Series controller represented as a
custom type, the type information is stored in that image file. This allows the
EcoStruxure BMS server to associate the MP Series controller with the custom
type.
To perform a field deploy for an MP Series controller

application
1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, select the MP Series controller.
2. In the Actions menu, point to Device and then click Generate image.
3. In the Generate image dialog box, select the type of image file to generate.
For more information, see section 17.4 “Generate Image Dialog Box” on page
461.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Save as dialog, select a location for the image file.
6. In the File name box, enter a file name.
7. Click Save.
You can now use the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to upload and deploy
the saved image file to other MP Series controllers. For more information, see
section 13.1 “eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool” on page 329.

72
2.10 Adding an IP Address to the White List in an MP Series Controller
2.10 Adding an IP Address to the White List

in an MP Series Controller
You add IP addresses to the white list in order to designate those devices that are
allowed authorized access by the MP Series controller. For Cybersecurity purposes,
only the IP addresses you enter here are granted TCP/IP communication access.
To add an IP address to the white list in an MP Series

controller
then select the IP network.
2. Select the MP Series controller.
3. Expand the device folder and click System.
4. In the List view, click Settings.
5. In the File menu, click Properties.
6. In the Allowed IP addresses box, click .

7. In the Create Object:IP Address Naming the object page, enter the
name of the new IP address and click Create.
8. In the IP Address list, double-click in the new, blank field.
9. In the Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box, enter the new IP address. For
more information, see section 17.10 “Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box” on
page 469.
10. Click OK.

73
2.11 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module
2.11 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O

Module
The MP Series controller features both onboard I/O and a built-in power supply
designed to accommodate 24 VAC (MP-C and MP-V) or 24-30 VDC (MP-C) input
power. The power supply is based on a half-wave rectified, non-isolated design,
complemented by electronic protection components for transient and overload
protection and EMC compliance.
By utilizing its onboard I/O with connected field devices, such as sensors and
actuators, the MP Series controller controls and supervises equipment that is
typically used in HVAC applications. Indeed, you can use the flexible mix of I/O point
types provided in the MP-C as well as the controller, damper actuator, and airflow
sensors available in the MP-V to suit a wide range of VAV and other HVAC
applications.
Specifically, the integrated airflow sensor is designed to sense the differential
pressure in the inlet section of a VAV unit, while the integrated actuator is beneficial
in building control and management since it allows for simplified installation of the
MP-V directly over the damper shaft. This eliminates the need for separate
installation, wiring, and positioning of the damper motor.

74
2.12 Configuring Terminals on the Onboard I/O Module
2.12 Configuring Terminals on the Onboard

I/O Module
You configure the terminal on the point object to assign the physical point to the
logical point object. This is analogous to configuring the I/O point channel number.
Note
For tristate objects, the type will occupy 2 terminals and the system shall always
assign the second terminal to be immediately adjacent to the first. If the adjacent
channel is not available, then the assignment is rejected by the system.
For more information, see section 2.11 “MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module”
on page 74.
To configure terminals on the onboard I/O module

and then select Application
2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller I/O point.
3. On the File menu, select Properties.
4. In the Basic tab, in the Terminal box, click the ellipsis button.
5. In the Select Object dialog box, select the onboard IO terminal.
Important
No onboard IO terminals display in this dialog if the point you are
creating for the MP Series controller is not supported by the available
terminal types.
6. Click Select.
The Terminal box now displays the specified onboard IO terminal.
7. Click OK.

75
2.13 Configure MP Series Controller Workflow
2.13 Configure MP Series Controller

Workflow
After you physically install the MP Series controller, you then use WorkStation to
fully configure and program the device.
Use this workflow to configure the MP Series controllers at your site. Related
information can be found in the sections that follow the flowchart.
Figure: Configure MP Series controller workflow

76
Configure the IP Address for the MP Series controller

Configure the IP address when you power up the MP Series controller. You can
configure the controller to use a static IP address, which requires manual
configuration, or a dynamic IP address, which sets the IP address automatically. For
more information, see section 1.14 “ IP Address Assignment for MP Series
Create a BACnet Interface

Create a BACnet interface to enable the BACnet communications port on an
EcoStruxure BMS server. For more information, see the Creating a BACnet
Interface topic on WebHelp.
Create or discover an MP Series controller

Create an MP Series controller, or use Device Discovery when you want to establish
a new device on the network. If you create the device, you may enter a BACnet
Device ID during the creation process, or assign the ID as part of the hosting
process. For more information, see section 2.2 “Creating an MP Series Controller ”
on page 63.
Establish a device association

Do so by using the Associate with device command or by dragging and
dropping the device from the Device Discovery view.
Use Associate with device in those situations where you created an MP Series
controller, but did not assign a BACnet instance number to the device. For
example, you may have created a device, but did not know the instance number at
the time. For more information, see the Associating a BACnet Instance Number with
a Device topic on WebHelp.
You can establish the same device association by dragging and dropping a device
from the Device Discovery view to the IP network beneath the BACnet Interface.
on page 99.
Download database objects to an MP Series controller

Download the objects in the database to an MP Series controller. For more
information, see the Downloading the Contents of a BACnet Device topic on
WebHelp.
Create objects
Create objects such as Script and Function Block programs.
For more information, see the Creating a Script Program topic on WebHelp.
For more information, see the Creating a Function Block Program topic on
WebHelp.
Bind values in MP Series controller programs

Bind values in MP Series controller Script programs. For more information, see the
Binding Values in Script Editor Using Auto Binding topic on WebHelp.
Save the bindings and programs

Save the bindings and programs to ensure there are no syntax errors.

77
For more information, see the Checking and Saving a Script Program topic on
WebHelp.
For more information, see the Saving a Function Block Program topic on WebHelp.
Download the program to an MP Series controller

Once the bindings and programs are saved, the program is downloaded to the
BACnet device where it executes. For more information, see the BACnet Download
topic on WebHelp.

78
2.14 Initializing the BACnet ID of an MP Series Controller
2.14 Initializing the BACnet ID of an MP

Series Controller
You initialize the BACnet ID of an MP Series controller by assigning a device ID to
an uninitialized device.
For more information, see section 3.2 “MP Series Controller Device Management”
on page 90.
To initialize the BACnet ID of an MP Series controller

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, select the EcoStruxure BMS
server where you want to identify the controllers that require their BACnet IDs
be initialized.
2. Click the Device Discovery view.
3. Select BACnet devices.
4. In the Network device list, navigate to the ID initialization required items
and right-click the uninitialized device.
5. In the Actions menu, click Initialize ID.
6. In the Assign Device ID dialog box, in the Device ID box, enter the device
ID.
7. Click OK.

79
2.15 Changing an MP Series Controller Device ID
2.15 Changing an MP Series Controller

Device ID
You change an MP Series controller device ID after the device has been configured
or initialized in order to fix a duplicate ID or move a controller.
on page 90.
To change an MP Series controller device ID

2. In the Actions menu, point to Device and then click Change ID.
3. In the Confirm Change dialog box, click Yes.
4. In the Change device ID dialog box, enter the new device ID and click OK.
You now manually repair the references that the system did not fix.
For more information, see section 2.16 “MP Series Controller References and
Device ID Changes” on page 81.

80
2.16 MP Series Controller References and Device ID Changes
2.16 MP Series Controller References and

Device ID Changes
After the MP Series controller has been configured or commissioned, you can
change the device ID. Changing the device ID affects BACnet references to this
device, however.
Note
The target of the references can be the device itself or any of its children.
If there are references to objects in the controller, the system attempts to repair
them. For example, the following BACnet references are updated:
• A reference source managed by the same EcoStruxure BMS server
• A reference that contains the EcoStruxure Building Operation path to the
reference source
A device that contains a reference to the MP Series controller and is hosted by
EcoStruxure BMS server may have two references: a BACnet reference and an
EcoStruxure Building Operation controller reference. The system needs the
EcoStruxure Building Operation reference in order to repair the BACnet reference.
The system does not repair the following references:
• A reference source managed by a different EcoStruxure BMS server
• A reference that contains only BACnet IDs (that is only the foreign reference).
You must manually repair those references EcoStruxure BMS does not fix. When
repairing the BACnet reference, you need to manually edit the reference to include
the changed Device ID of the MP Series controller. After the system repairs the
references, you must perform the following actions depending on where the
reference source resides:
• If the reference source resides in an external BACnet device, the reference
source displays in the System Tree pane with the download required icon
. Be sure to perform a system download to send the updated reference to
the device.
• If the reference source resides in the EcoStruxure BMS server, be sure to
restart the EcoStruxure BMS server for the new reference to take effect in
runtime.
Note
The types of references included in this topic are PropertyReference,
PropertyReference List, ObjectReference, and ObjectReferenceList. References
whose reference source is within the same device should not require an update.

81
2.17 MP Series Controller Standard Objects

Standard objects are collections of objects that are stored and executed on the
server, rather than the controller. You may find them useful in expanding the logical
control application with supporting server objects that do not reside or execute in
the controller.
For example, you may add graphics and trend charts to help visualize an MP Series
controller's zone control application. Standard objects include the following items:
• Alarms
• Graphics
• Notifications
• Programs
• Schedules
• Trends
• Utility objects
• Values
• Views
• Assignments
• Documents
• Hyperlinks
• Panels
• Reports
• Search objects
• Shortcuts
You create these objects in the MP Series controller Application folder or its sub-
folders. They execute in the EcoStruxure BMS server and not in the controller,
however. For example, you create Script program A as an MP Series controller
Script program that executes in the MP Series controller. You then create Script
program B as an EcoStruxure Building Operation Script program that executes in
the EcoStruxure BMS server.
Both Script program A and Script program B may look similar in WorkStation and
visually, they also coexist in the MP Series controller Application folder. However,
MP Series controllers are BACnet device objects, while EcoStruxure Building
Operation objects are not
To differentiate them, notice the differences in the accompanying icons. You can
also view the Object category property in the List View to determine which is the
Script program Standard object.

82
Figure: MP Series controller standard objects

As a further differentiator, you may also want to create a special folder in the MP
Series controller for your Standard objects. You can also develop your own naming
convention such as appending SO or something similar for each of the Standard
objects you create.

83
2.18 Resetting MP Series Controller Type Information
2.18 Resetting MP Series Controller Type

Information
You reset MP Series controller type information to resolve unexpected type
information issues.
To reset MP Series controller type information

2. In the Actions menu, select Device and then click Repair Hosting.
3. In the System Tree pane, select the device again.
4. In the Actions menu, select Device and then click Download all objects.

84
Management and
Communication
Topics
MP Series Controller Management and Communication
MP Series Controller Device Management
MP Series Controller Diagnostics
Retrieving MP Series Controller Diagnostics
Device Discovery for MP Series Controllers
Discovering MP Series Controllers
Hiding MP Series Controllers in Device Discovery
Clearing MP Series Controller Host Information
Discover MP Series Controller Workflow
Automatic Time Sync for MP Series Controllers
MP Series Controller Firmware Management
Updating Firmware in MP Series Controllers
MP Series Controller Communication
MP Series Controller Device Communication Commands
MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD Registration
Registering an MP Series Controller as a Foreign Device
Renewing Foreign Device Registration
MP Series Controller Download and Upload Commands
Associate an MP Series Controller
3 MP Series Controller Management and Communication
3.1 MP Series Controller Management and Communication
3.1 MP Series Controller Management and

Communication
As a BACnet device, you can manage the MP Series controller using a BACnet
client that conforms to one of the BACnet Operator device profiles.
3.1.1 MP Series Controller Device Management

Operator Workstation (B-OWS) and provides additional capabilities including a full
set of management features for MP Series controllers. By contrast, when you use a
third-party BACnet client to manage the MP Series controller, management is
limited to standard BACnet features and may include further restrictions when these
controllers are hosted by an EcoStruxure BMS server.
on page 90.
3.1.2 MP Series Controller Diagnostics

You can retrieve and view diagnostics in WorkStation or download and view that
information using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool.
For more information, see section 3.3 “MP Series Controller Diagnostics” on page
94.
3.1.3 Device Discovery for MP Series Controllers

You can discover MP Series controllers and objects on a directly connected
network, or on subnetworks in the BACnet Interface.
on page 99.
3.1.4 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow

You discover MP Series controllers in order to identify these devices on a BACnet
network and then host them within a SmartX server or Enterprise Server.
For more information, see section 3.9 “Discover MP Series Controller Workflow” on
page 103.
3.1.5 Automatic Time Sync for MP Series Controllers

With automatic time sync, you no longer need to manually add MP Series
controllers to the Local time synchronization recipients list. When an MP Series
controller is hosted and online in the EcoStruxure BMS server database, it is
automatically added to the BACnet Interface’s time sync list.

87
For more information, see section 3.10 “Automatic Time Sync for MP Series
3.1.6 MP Series Controller Firmware Management

Using WorkStation, you can update the firmware of multiple MP Series controllers
and their attached SmartX Sensors at the same time with minimum downtime.
3.1.7 MP Series Controller Communication

EcoStruxure BMS servers communicate with MP Series controllers and allow you to
create new objects, enable alarm creation and management, and provide the
opportunity to download, and share data with other devices. From WorkStation, MP
Series controllers associated with the connected EcoStruxure BMS server are
represented in the System Tree pane.
For more information, see section 3.13 “MP Series Controller Communication ” on
page 109.
3.1.8 MP Series Controller Device Communication

Commands
You can execute the necessary commands to enable, disable, and disable initiation
of device communication on an MP Series controller.
For more information, see section 3.14 “MP Series Controller Device
Communication Commands” on page 110.
3.1.9 MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD

Registration
A foreign device may be a full-time node on a foreign IP subnet or a part-time
participant. There are no restrictions on where foreign devices reside or how they
gain access to the BACnet network. Typically, you connect foreign devices to the
BACnet network by registering them with a BBMD.
For more information, see section 3.15 “MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD
Registration” on page 111.
3.1.10 MP Series Controller Download and Upload

You download data when you want to use the data in the EcoStruxure BMS server
rather than the data in the physical MP Series controller. By contrast, you upload
data when you want to use the data in the physical device rather than the data in

88
For more information, see section 3.18 “MP Series Controller Download and
Upload Commands” on page 114.
3.1.11 Associate an MP Series Controller

You associate an MP Series controller with the MP Series controller object in the
EcoStruxure BMS server in order to add or delete objects, or change values of
existing objects.
For more information, see section 3.19 “Associate an MP Series Controller” on
page 115.

89
3.2 MP Series Controller Device Management
3.2 MP Series Controller Device

Management
Operator Workstation (B-OWS) and provides additional capabilities including a full
set of management features for MP Series controllers. By contrast, when you use a
third-party BACnet client to manage the MP Series controller, management is
limited to standard BACnet features and may include further restrictions when these
controllers are hosted by an EcoStruxure BMS server.
For more information, see section 1.13 “EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP
3.2.1 Uninitialized MP Series Controllers

MP Series controllers without an assigned BACnet Device Identifier (that is, where
the BACnet ID = 4194303 (decimal) or 3fff (hex)) are in an uninitialized state. With
these controllers, the network property is set to ID initialization required and
they are grouped in the Device Discovery view under that same heading.
Figure: ID initialization required

You must initialize their BACnet ID before these devices can communicate with
other BACnet devices. For more information, see section 2.14 “Initializing the
BACnet ID of an MP Series Controller” on page 79.
Note
Should any MNB devices requiring initialization exist in the network, they are
displayed with the network property value of MNB ID initialization required in
the Device Discovery view.

90
Alternatively, you can manually configure a BACnet device proxy object in

EcoStruxure BMS with the same type (model) and serial number as the MP Series
controller. When the EcoStruxure BMS server discovers a BACnet device with a
matching serial number, it initializes the BACnet ID of that device as configured in
the pre-configured proxy object.
3.2.2 Non-conformant Devices

Any BACnet Devices that do not conform to BACnet standard device rules in their
current state are identified as non-conformant devices. While a device is in a non-
conforming state, it cannot communicate properly as a BACnet device. If possible,
you may use the configurations methods provided by the BACnet vendor of BTL
listed devices to resolve the non-conformance issue. Be aware that devices that are
not BTL listed may have a compliance issue you cannot resolve with configuration
changes, however.
Common reasons why devices are identified as non-conforming include the
following:
• Duplicate device names
• Duplicate BACnet IDs
• Non-initialized BACnet IDs (0x3fff value)
In the Device Discovery view, such devices are grouped under a heading of Non-
conformant Devices.
Figure: Non-conformant devices

The exceptions here are devices native to EcoStruxure BMS including the following:
• MP Series controllers that are non-initialized (identified with a network property
value of ID initialization required)
• MNB controllers that have a BACnet ID of 0 (identified with a network property
value of MNB ID initialization required)
All other devices that are non-conforming are placed in the Non-conformant
devices folder as described.

91
Continued
Duplicate ID Duplicate name ID=0x3fff
Generic BACnet Non-conformant Non-conformant Non-conformant

device devices folder devices folder devices folder
MP Series controller Non-conformant Non-conformant ID initialization

devices folder devices folder required
MNB (if 0 = MNB ID Non-conformant Normally does not

Initialization devices folder apply, but would be
Required), placed in the
Non-conformant Non-conformant
devices folder devices folder
b3 Non-conformant Non-conformant
devices folder devices folder
3.2.3 Third-party Client Management

When you use a third-party BACnet client, management of the MP Series controller
is limited to standard BACnet features and may include further restrictions based on
whether or not the device is hosted by an EcoStruxure BMS server. For example,
when an MP Series controller is hosted by an EcoStruxure BMS server, that server
is responsible for the application within the device. As such, the EcoStruxure BMS
server is the only BACnet device that can create or delete objects, edit programs
and change BACnet IDs within the MP Series controller. Furthermore, change
requests from third-party clients that interfere with a shared solution are rejected by
the device.
With an EcoStruxure BMS server as its host, other BACnet clients can still monitor
standard BACnet objects and perform runtime actions such as:
• Read values of standard BACnet properties
• Manage the priority array of commandable BACnet objects (for example,
override values)
• Write BACnet values marked as writable in the Protocol Implementation
Conference Statement (PICS)
• View and BACnet acknowledge those alarms of which it is a recipient
• Edit BACnet Schedule events
• View BACnet trend data
3.2.4 MP Series Controller References and Device ID

Changes
After the MP Series controller has been configured or commissioned, you can
change the device ID. Changing the device ID affects BACnet references to this
device, however.

92
For more information, see section 2.16 “MP Series Controller References and
Device ID Changes” on page 81.

93
3.3 MP Series Controller Diagnostics

You can retrieve and view diagnostics in WorkStation or download and view that
information using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool.
Diagnostics include device, crash, and IO checkout reports, as well as error, flow
balance (MP-V only) and commissioning logs.
Figure: MP Series controller diagnostics
3.3.1 Error Log

The error log provides a list of current errors in the MP Series controller that you can
troubleshoot and correct. The error log is similar to the logs used in the b3 BACnet
device with comparable tracing capabilities.

94
Figure: MP Series controller error log
3.3.2 Device Report

The device report allows you to extract diagnostic information from the MP Series
controller and troubleshoot problems quickly and efficiently. It is accessible from
either EcoStruxure BMS or the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool.

95
Figure: Sample MP Series controller device report
Note
The Free object system memory entry in the report specifies how much
memory is available for object creation and trend logs.
3.3.3 Crash Report File

The crash report file is not human-readable. Should it be necessary, Schneider
Electric support may request that you download and email this file.
3.3.4 Commissioning Log

You use the commissioning log to investigate or validate the tasks performed with
the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool. Activity logs may include the following
information:
• A time and date stamp
• A unique user identifier, such as a user account and role
• Category information such as air balance, configuration, checkout, firmware
update and application load data

96
• A description of the change performed with the tool
3.3.5 IO Checkout Report

You use the IO checkout report to produce status reports as a job progresses.
Such reports allow technicians and/or electricians to determine whether the IO of all
controllers is installed and operating correctly.
3.3.6 Flow Balance Logs

In the MP-V, you use these logs to obtain log data on the flow balancing process.
For more information, see section 14.2 “Air Flow and Flow Balancing” on page 338.

97
3.4 Retrieving MP Series Controller Diagnostics
3.4 Retrieving MP Series Controller

Diagnostics
You can retrieve diagnostics from your MP Series controller and use that
information to troubleshoot and correct problems.
To retrieve MP Series controller diagnostics

2. In the Actions menu, click Device, followed by Diagnostics.
3. Click the specified diagnostic report or log file:
• Click Get Error Log to display a text file with a list of current errors in the
MP Series controller
• Click Get Device Report to display a text file with diagostic messages
that you can use to troubleshoot problems.
• Click Get crash report file to download a crash report file that you can
email to Schneider Electric customer support should they request it.
This report assists them in diagnosing the cause of the crash and
recommending corrective actions.
• Click Get commissioning log to obtain the activity log to investigate or
validate the tasks that were performed with the eCommission SmartX
Controllers tool.
• Click Flow balance log in the MP-V to obtain log data on the flow
balancing process.
• Click Get IO checkout report to produce status reports as a job
progresses.
These reports allow technicians and/or electricians to determine whether
the IO of all the controllers is installed and operating correctly.

98
3.5 Device Discovery for MP Series Controllers
3.5 Device Discovery for MP Series

Controllers
You can discover MP Series controllers and objects on a directly connected
network, or on subnetworks in the BACnet Interface.
Figure: MP Series controller device discovery

When you intially open the Device Discovery view, the displayed information is
cached from the server, so this information may not be the latest information. You
need to click the Discover all button to obtain the latest information. For
more information, see section 3.6 “Discovering MP Series Controllers ” on page
100.
3.5.1 Hiding Devices

You can also simplify the Device Discovery view by hiding devices that you do not
need to see in the view, for example. For more information, see section 3.7 “Hiding
MP Series Controllers in Device Discovery ” on page 101.
Tip
MP Series controllers may not display if the device was previously discovered and
hidden. For more information, see section 19.2 “MP Series Controller Does Not
Display in Device Discovery” on page 662.
3.5.2 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow

For more information, see section 3.9 “Discover MP Series Controller Workflow” on
page 103.

99
3.6 Discovering MP Series Controllers
3.6 Discovering MP Series Controllers

You discover MP Series controllers in order to create these controllers in the
EcoStruxure BMS server.
on page 99.
To discover MP Series controllers

server where you want to discover the MP Series controller.
3. In the Select device type box, select BACnet devices.
4. Click the Discover all button to discover all devices and obtain the latest
information.
5. In the Quick filter box, type the specified text to filter the view and display
only the device types you want.
6. Click Objects to view the objects of a selected device in the pane on the
right.
Tip
For performance reasons, it is recommended that you keep this pane
closed if you do not need to view objects on the selected device.
When the pane is closed, objects are not fetched.
7. Select the MP Series controller you want in the view.

8. Drag that controller to the target IP Network in the System Tree pane to
create the device in the EcoStruxure Building Operation database.
Use the same network where the actual MP Series controller resides.
9. In the Information dialog box, click OK.
Now that you have discovered the MP Series controller, you upload its
contents. For more information, see the Uploading the Contents of a BACnet
Device topic on WebHelp.
Note
Uploading a factory-fresh device creates no objects in the database
because there are no default objects in the MP Series controller.
However, following a deploy or a re-hosting of a previously populated
MP Series controller, the upload creates objects in the EcoStruxure
BMS server database.

100
3.7 Hiding MP Series Controllers in Device Discovery
3.7 Hiding MP Series Controllers in Device

Discovery
You hide MP Series controllers in order to simplify the Device Discovery view by
concealing devices that you may not want to view.
on page 99.
To hide MP Series controllers in Device Discovery

4. Select the MP Series controller, right-click, and click Hide to conceal a device.
5. Click the Show hidden devices button to show the hidden devices.
6. Click the Show hidden devices button again if you want to show all of the
devices except the hidden ones.

101
3.8 Clearing MP Series Controller Host Information
3.8 Clearing MP Series Controller Host

Information
In the Device Discovery view, you clear MP Series controller host information in
response to device already hosted errors during drag and drop operations. These
devices are already hosted in the EcoStruxure BMS server.
on page 99.
To clear MP Series controller host information

4. In the Device Discovery view, drag one or more MP Series controllers to the
System Tree pane.
5. When the device already hosted error displays, select the specified
controller(s).
6. Right-click, and click Clear host information.
You can now drag and drop these controllers to the System Tree pane.

102
3.9 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow
3.9 Discover MP Series Controller Workflow

Use this workflow to discover the MP Series controllers at your site. Related
information can be found in the sections that follow the flowchart.
Figure: Discover MP Series controller workflow
Discover the MP Series controller

In the Device Discovery view, discover the controller and drag the device to the
System Tree pane. When you do so, you create the MP Series controller proxy
object or associate it with an existing device proxy object in the EcoStruxure
Building Operation database.
For more information, see section 3.6 “Discovering MP Series Controllers ” on page
100.
Upload the contents of the device

You then upload the contents of the device to create the objects in the database.
For more information, see the Uploading the Contents of a BACnet Device topic on
WebHelp.

103
3.10 Automatic Time Sync for MP Series Controllers
3.10 Automatic Time Sync for MP Series

Controllers
With automatic time sync, you no longer need to manually add MP Series
controllers to the Local time synchronization recipients list. When an MP Series
controller is hosted and online in the EcoStruxure BMS server database, it is
automatically added to the BACnet Interface’s time sync list.
Note
EcoStruxure BMS sends a time sync devices request as MP Series controllers are
added to the time sync list. In effect, this operates like an immediate time sync
request.
Figure: Time sync recipients tab

By default, all of the devices in this list receive their own BACnet time
synchronization requests. EcoStruxure BMS servers send this request at thirty-eight
minutes past the hour or whenever their clocks are changed. For more information,
see the BACnet Time Synchronization topic on WebHelp.
MP Series controllers are also automatically removed from the time sync list when
they are removed from the EcoStruxure BMS server's database.

104
3.11 MP Series Controller Firmware Management
3.11 MP Series Controller Firmware

Management
Using WorkStation, you can update the firmware of multiple MP Series controllers
and their attached SmartX Sensors at the same time with minimum downtime.
You have three options for updating the downloaded firmware:
• Schedule immediately
• Schedule manually
• Schedule at a specified time
3.11.1 Hosting Different Firmware Versions

The EcoStruxure BMS server keeps track of the installed firmware to support
backup, restore, and replacement of the MP Series controllers and their SmartX
sensors. The EcoStruxure BMS server can host MP Series controllers of different
firmware versions. The MP Series controller firmware is version independent from
the server, however.
You use the MP Series controller Firmware Management view to view and manage
firmware that can be downloaded to devices from the server.
Figure: Firmware management view

105
3.11.2 Firmware Upgrade Guidelines

Be aware of the following guidelines when downloading, activating, and upgrading
firmware in MP Series controllers:
• Attempting to download and activate the wrong device firmware is prohibited
by the EcoStruxure BMS.
For example, you cannot download and install MP-V firmware on an MP-C.
• Removing the MP Series controller firmware is permitted as long as you have
path permissions to the path where the firmware is stored.
• Deleting MP Series controller firmware that is in use by any other MP Series
controller is prohibited.
• Changing the name of the MP Series controller firmware in the EcoStruxure
BMS is prohibited.
Important
Initiating multiple firmware upgrades on a single daisy chain network may
introduce significant risks. The physical upgrade and restart of one group of
controllers may interfere with the firmware file transfer and/or activation of another
group. For example, initiating an MP-C firmware upgrade on all MP-C controllers
on the same daisy chain network, closely followed by an upgrade of a single MP-
V on the same daisy chain network, may cause the MP-C controllers to restart
during the MP-V download. This may break communications and cause the
firmware download to fail.
It is recommended then that you do not perform multiple firmware upgrades on a
single daisy-chain network (that is, initiate multiple upgrade actions rather than
upgrade multiple controllers in a single action). Instead, you should allow any on-
going firmware upgrades to complete before initiating additional upgrades on the
same daisy chain (or RSTP) network.
3.11.3 Active and Inactive Memory for Firmware

The MP Series controller contains both an active and an inactive memory space for
firmware. The active firmware memory space contains the firmware version
currently in use. When you update the firmware, the new version is initially stored in
the inactive memory space. When you trigger the firmware to become active, the
active and inactive firmware memories are swapped. This allows you to perform
rapid updates that you can either execute immediately or defer to a schedule date.
Should an error occur, the firmware automatically reverts to the previous version.
3.11.4 Firmware Recovery

If the MP Series controller detects an issue where it can no longer maintain control
or, repeatedly goes on and offline due to a firmware or database issue, a recovery
algorithm in the controller may initiate a number of corrective actions to
automatically restore or put the controller in a known state, thus allowing you to
manually recover the controller and its complete functions.

106
Note
Specific alarms for each recovery state are generated by the MP Series controller
and depend on communication between the controller and EcoStruxure BMS
server. If communication is compromised (for example, if the controller is offline),
EcoStruxure BMS issues a generic alarm for an offline device.
Correction actions may include the following:

• Deleting the controller's database
The MP Series controller detects a problem in its database and deletes that
database to permit a correct boot operation. In this state, the controller may
appear online, but it no longer controls its connected equipment. An alarm
displays informing you about the state of the controller and requesting you
perform remedial action. In such cases, you should download the database
from WorkStation.
• Reverting the controller firmware
The recovery algorithm determines that the controller is experiencing issues
running the most recent (active) firmware. If so, the controller reverts to running
its previous (inactive) firmware version. This may occur in conjunction with
deleting the database, or independently. That is, the database may remain
intact if the algorithm determines that the database is not at fault. An alarm
displays informing you about the state of the controller and requesting remedial
action. Be sure to download the database from WorkStation. You may also try
upgrading the device to a different firmware version if the reverted version is not
optimal (for example, if more recent security patches are required). For more
information, see section 3.12 “Updating Firmware in MP Series Controllers” on
page 108.
• Recovering the firmware in recovery mode
Should either of the previous recovery methods fail to restore the controller,
this is the last line of defense. In the controller's Upgrade firmware context
menu, you perform a manual revert by selecting Revert device fimware.
This restarts the controller, deletes the controller's database, exchanges the
active and inactive firmware versions, and boots the controller from the now
active (reverted) firmware. Once you have taken this action, the controller
should boot to a fully functional condition. However, it is recommended that
you always select Download all objects following a manual revert in order to
return to full operation.
Tip
If Connected Services are active (requires registration), all such failures and
recovery actions are reported directly to Schneider Electric to help improve
reliability and recovery.

107
3.12 Updating Firmware in MP Series Controllers
3.12 Updating Firmware in MP Series

Controllers
You update the firmware in order to upgrade MP Series controllers in EcoStruxure
BMS. You can also select multiple controllers and perform a mass firmware update.
Note
To minimize the time it takes to perform an update, the I/O board is not updated
when the downloaded firmware package contains an I/O board revision that
matches the current version in the controller.
To update firmware in MP Series controllers

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, click Server.
2. In the List View, click Control Panel.
3. In Control Panel, under BACnet, click MP-X Devices.
4. When the simple Search pane displays, select the MP Series controller(s).
5. In the Actions menu, point to Device, point to Upgrade firmware and
then click Select device firmware.
6. In the Select Firmware box, click Browse and then select an MP Series
controller firmware file to upload.
7. Click Download firmware to download the firmware to the MP Series
controller(s).
8. Select the preferred Activation method: Manually, Immediately, or at a
specified Time.
For more information, see section 17.12 “Select Firmware Dialog Box” on
page 471.
9. Click OK.
10. In the simple Search pane, check the Upgrade progress column to view
and monitor update status.
11. Right-click on the column heading bar and click Add/Remove columns.
12. In the Add/Remove columns dialog box, select Application software
version to view the currently installed software.
13. Click OK.
When the update is completed, the application software version should match
the firmware version you just uploaded.

108
3.13 MP Series Controller Communication
3.13 MP Series Controller Communication

EcoStruxure BMS servers communicate with MP Series controllers and allow you to
create new objects, enable alarm creation and management, and provide the
opportunity to download, and share data with other devices. From WorkStation, MP
Series controllers associated with the connected EcoStruxure BMS server are
represented in the System Tree pane.
Note
Associating involves linking a discovered device with a device proxy object in
EcoStruxure BMS. For more information, see the Associating a BACnet Instance
Number with a Device topic on WebHelp.
Figure: SmartX server with an MP Series controller in the System Tree pane
Number Description
The BACnet interface contains folders

and networks that hold the configuration
data for the EcoStruxure BMS server and the
networks and SmartX servers it hosts. This
includes IP networks and MP Series
controllers.
The IP network is associated with the

device. EcoStruxure BMS servers
communicate with BACnet devices like the
MP Series controller over IP networks. The
system automatically creates an initial IP
network when you create a BACnet
Interface.
In the Application folder for the MP Series

controller, you create and manage inputs,
outputs, values, functions, programs,
alarms, schedules, and other EcoStruxure
Building Operation objects.

109
3.14 MP Series Controller Device Communication Commands
3.14 MP Series Controller Device

Communication Commands
With an MP Series controller, you can enable, disable, and disable initiation of
device communication on an MP Series controller. For more information, see the
Actions Menu – Device Submenu – Communication Submenu topic on WebHelp.
The following table lists the MP Series device communication commands and
indicates whether you need to provide a password or use the time duration
property to disable or limit the communication of a BACnet device with other
BACnet devices on the BACnet internetwork. For more information, see the BACnet
Device Communication Dialog Box topic on WebHelp.
Communication Time duration Password
command
Enable No No
Disable Yes No
Disable initiation Yes No
You can immediately renew COV subscriptions and override the system’s five-
minute refresh interval for COV variables when an MP Series controller goes
offline unexpectedly, for example during a network disconnect or power outage. For
more information, see the Refreshing COV Subscriptions topic on WebHelp.
You can view the number of properties using the BACnet COV service as well as
the various polling times on each network. For more information, see the
Diagnosing Polled Variables on a BACnet Network topic on WebHelp.

110
3.15 MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD Registration
3.15 MP Series Controller Foreign Device

BBMD Registration
A foreign device may be a full-time node on a foreign IP subnet or a part-time
participant. There are no restrictions on where foreign devices reside or how they
gain access to the BACnet network. Typically, you connect foreign devices to the
BACnet network by registering them with a BBMD.
If an MP Series controller and a BBMD are located on different BACnet IP subnets,
you register the MP Series controller as a foreign device with the BBMD.
Figure: MP Series controller registered as a foreign device

For more information, see section 3.16 “Registering an MP Series Controller as a
Foreign Device ” on page 112.

111
3.16 Registering an MP Series Controller as a Foreign Device
3.16 Registering an MP Series Controller as a

Foreign Device
You register the MP Series controller as a foreign device if the controller and the
BBMD are located on different BACnet IP subnets.
For more information, see section 3.15 “MP Series Controller Foreign Device BBMD
Registration” on page 111.
To register an MP Series controller as a foreign device

4. In the Basic tab of the IP Network Settings properties pane, click Foreign
in the IP Mode box to indicate that the controller is operating as a foreign
device over this IP network.
5. In the BBMD box, type the BBMD address the controller should use to
register as a foreign device, followed by a colon (:) and the port number.
6. In the Subscription lifetime box, enter the number of seconds the
controller waits before renewing its subscription with the BBMD.
7. Click Yes.
8. Click Ok.

112
3.17 Renewing Foreign Device Registration
3.17 Renewing Foreign Device Registration

You renew FD (foreign device) registration in order to force the MP Series controller
to renew its BBMD registration period.
To renew foreign device registration in the MP Series

controller
3. In the Actions menu, point to IP commands and then click Renew FD
Registration.
Tip
Renewing the FD Registration does not become effective until you
click Activate changes in the IP commands menu. Activating
changes causes the MP Series controller to apply the changes and
then automatically perform a warm start.

113
3.18 MP Series Controller Download and Upload Commands
3.18 MP Series Controller Download and

Upload Commands
You download data when you want to use the data in the EcoStruxure BMS server
rather than the data in the physical MP Series controller. By contrast, you upload
data when you want to use the data in the physical device rather than the data in
The download and upload commands for MP Series controllers operate in the same
way as they do in other EcoStruxure BMS BACnet devices. For more information,
see the BACnet Download and Upload topic on WebHelp.
There are some differences in the way the download and upload configuration
commands work in the MP Series controller, however. In the MP Series controllers,
you use the download and upload configuration commands to download and
upload the following objects:
• Devices
• IP Network Settings
• Settings
Typically, in BACnet, you download and upload the configuration properties of the
BACnet device from the EcoStruxure BMS server to update only the device's
configuration properties. You do this to download and upload only device
properties without disturbing any other objects.
For more information, see the Downloading Configuration Properties topic on
WebHelp.
For more information, see the Uploading Configuration Properties topic on
WebHelp.

114
3.19 Associate an MP Series Controller
3.19 Associate an MP Series Controller

You associate an MP Series controller with the MP Series controller object in the
EcoStruxure BMS server in order to add or delete objects, or change values of
existing objects.
When an MP Series controller and its object have a custom type, the type and the
version should match. When the versions do not match, you can choose to accept
or cancel the association. For more information, see section 19.1 “Device Custom
Type Versions Do Not Match” on page 661.
When the controller and the controller object have custom types that do not match,
the association fails. For more information, see section 19.7 “Device Custom Types
Do Not Match” on page 667.

115
4 MP Series Controller I/O Points
Topics
MP Series Controller I/O Points
MP Series Controller Persistence
MP Series Controller Unit Conversion
Creating an MP Series Controller Input Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Counter Input Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Current Input Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Input Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Resistive Input Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input
Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Supervised Input Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Temperature Input
Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Voltage Input Point
Creating an MP Series Controller Output Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Current Output Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Output Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output
Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated
Output Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Tristate Output Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output
Point
Configuring an MP Series Controller Voltage Output Point
4.1 MP Series Controller I/O Points

MP Series controllers offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match the majority
of application types. Most I/O points are onboard and highly flexible, so you can
configure them as inputs or outputs including Form A relays, high current relays,
triac and analog outputs. The SmartX sensor bus allows for additional remote I/O
and human interfaces such as a SmartX sensor with options that include a
touchscreen display.
For example, the model MP-C-15A has I/O points of the following varieties:
• 8 Universal inputs/outputs, Ub type
• 6 Triac outputs
• 1 High power relay output
The model MP-V-7A has I/O points of the following varieties:
• 3 Universal inputs
• 3 Triac outputs
• 1 Analog output
For more information, see section 2.6 “MP Series Controller Models” on page 67.
4.1.1 Universal Inputs

The universal inputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow, status
points, and similar point types in a building control system. You can configure
universal inputs to read several different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
• 2-Wire RTD temperature
As counter inputs they are commonly used in energy metering applications. As RTD
inputs they are ideal for temperature points in a building control system. As
supervised inputs they are used for security applications where it is critical to know
whether or not a wire has been cut or shorted. These events provide a separate
indication of alarms and trouble conditions to the system. For more information, see
section 7.5 “ Creating an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm” on page 230.
4.1.2 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Like the universal inputs, universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of
temperature, pressure, flow, status points, and similar point types in a building
control system. You can also configure universal inputs/outputs to read the same
types of varied inputs.

119
As counter inputs, they are used in energy metering applications. As RTD inputs,
they are ideal for temperature points in a building control system. Finally, as
supervised inputs, they are invaluable in security applications.
At the same time, universal inputs/outputs are also capable of supporting analog
outputs of the voltage output type. Thus, universal inputs/outputs are capable of
supporting a wide range of devices, such as actuators.
Note
The difference between the Ub and Uc types of universal/inputs is that the Uc
type supports current outputs.
4.1.3 Triac Outputs

You can use triac outputs in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and last
longer than relays. In the MP Series controllers, the triacs are isolated and are less
susceptible to damage through miswiring.
4.1.4 Analog Output

The analog outputs are capable of supporting analog or voltage point types.
Therefore, analog outputs support a wide range of devices, such as actuators.
4.1.5 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
4.1.6 High Power Relay Output

The main application of the high power relay output is to power an electrical heating
battery directly.

120
4.2 MP Series Controller Persistence

Persistence is the state of occurring or existing beyond the usual, expected, or
normal time. For inputs, outputs, and value objects in the MP Series controller,
persistence operates as described.
Inputs
The value of inputs do not persist through a warm and cold start, while the value of
forced inputs do persist. By forcing an input, you set it to out of service. The out of
service setting for any point persists through a warm and cold start.
Outputs
The value of outputs always persist through a warm and cold start including a
forced output. Forcing an output sets the Forced Priority Level. The Forced Priority
Level is a global setting that you assign to forced values in the BACnet system. For
more information, see the Forced Priority Level topic on WebHelp.
Value
For value objects, the persistence retain level is configurable and defaults to not
retained.
DateTime and string do not have a priority array, while analog, digital, and multistate
do have a priority array. The retain level of each priority array element of interest
should be set.
Valid settings here are as follows:
• Not retained
• Warm start retained
• Cold start retained
Warm start retained values are retained through a warm start but not a cold start.
Cold start retained values are retained through a warm start and a cold start.
For example, to set the retain level to persist for a warm start in an analog value,
click the Configure Settings icon in the Priority 1 field of the Command
tab.

121
Figure: Analog value command tab priority 1 field

Then, set the Retain level to Warm start.

122
Figure: Retain level
Note
If you configure a value object as a setpoint in legacy Continuum, it is retained. In
the Value field of the value objects, cold start retained is exported.

123
4.3 MP Series Controller Unit Conversion

With MP Series controller internal binding objects, the unit conversion occurs in the
binding between objects. You can configure the following objects with units:
• All analog inputs and outputs
• All analog values
• Analog schedules
• Control loops
• Program input and output variables
• Trends
For example, to set units on a trend log, click the Configure Settings icon in
the Log device object property field in the Basic tab. When the Log device
object property dialog box displays, click Unit and the ellipsis button.
Figure: Unit conversion

In the Select Unit dialog box, select the unit family you want.

124
Figure: Unit selection
4.3.1 Conversion Factor

When two properties from different objects, both of which are configured with units
from the same unit family, are bound to each other, the binding includes a
conversion factor. This ensures the value of the property in each object is
maintained in the unit where it is configured. If you make any subsequent changes
to the configured units on either property, the conversion is updated upon save.
Note
Unit conversion in Function Block programs takes place on the block itself, while
conversions in Script programs occur in the Binding Variables view.
4.3.2 Control Loop Unit Configuration

Configuring the unit of the control loop object's value sets the manipulated variable
reference to the same unit. Similarly, configuring the unit of the control loop
controlled variable reference also sets the setpoint reference to the same unit.
Control Loop Error Conditions

Loop reliability is set as open-loop and fault status flag checked under the following
conditions:
• Loop controlled variable reference is not set.
• Controlled variable reference object is out of service.

125
• Manipulated variable reference binding command priority is not the active

command priority of the referenced object.
• Manipulated variable reference is out of service.
Loop reliability is set to unreliable-other and fault status flag checked when the
setpoint reference object is out of service.

126
4.4 Creating an MP Series Controller Input Point
4.4 Creating an MP Series Controller Input

Point
You create input points to represent where these points are physically wired to the
MP Series controller onboard I/O module.
119.
To create an MP Series controller input point

where you want to create the input point.
2. Select Application.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Point.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select the input point.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the input point.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the input point.
7. Click Next.
9. Manually enter an Instance ID, or click Automatically generated to have
the system generate the ID for you.
Once created, you cannot change the object’s Instance ID.
10. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the point.
Do not type a name if you want a name to be assigned for you.
11. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the point
from the external BACnet device
12. Click Next.
13. In the Advanced settings page, in the Terminal box, click the ellipsis
button.
14. In the Select Object dialog box, select the onboard IO terminal.
Important
No onboard IO terminals display in this dialog if the input point you
are creating for the MP Series controller is not supported by the
available terminal types.
15. Click Select.

16. In the Trend log box, click the ellipsis button.
17. In Create Object wizard, in the Name box, type a name for the trend log.
18. In the Description box, type a description for the trend log.

127
4.4 Creating an MP Series Controller Input Point
19. Click Next.

20. In the Bacnet basic settings page, click Download to BACnet device.
22. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the trend log.
23. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the trend log
from the external BACnet device
24. Click Create and then click Create once again.

128
4.5 Configuring an MP Series Controller Counter Input Point
4.5 Configuring an MP Series Controller

Counter Input Point
You configure MP Series controller counter inputs to represent where the points are
physically wired to the MP Series controller onboard I/O module.
119.
To configure an MP Series controller counter input point

and then select Application.
2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller counter input point.

129

Value Displays the present value.

• Unforce- Displays a forced value.
Enter a forced value or click to
release the value.
• Force- Displays a non-forced value.
Click to force the value. The
maximum value of a counter input is
4294967295. Once passed, that
value wraps to 0. The maximum
supported rate for a counter input is
25Hz.
Status flags Displays the condition or status of the

BACnet point. For more information, see
the BACnet Status Flags topic on
WebHelp.
Out of service Select True to disassociate the Value

from the physical input. Out of service is
primarily used for testing and
troubleshooting purposes, and for
override when an object is not
commandable.
Reset counter Select True to set the counter value to 0.

The reset counter turns back to False
after being set to True.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the point. For

more information, see section 5.8 “MP
Series Controller Reliability ” on page 203.
Event state Displays Off Normal when intrinsic

alarming has been configured and the
point is in an alarm state.
Alarm state Displays an alarm state on EcoStruxure

BMS servers that provides additional
information about an intrinsic alarm or
algorithmic alarm configured for an
object. For more information, see the
Alarm States topic on WebHelp.
Electrical type Displays the electrical type on the input

point.
Terminal Set the Onboard IO terminal and click

Select. For more information, see
section 2.12 “Configuring Terminals on
the Onboard I/O Module” on page 75.
COV increment Enter the minimum change in the Value

property that causes a COV notification to
be sent.

130




analog value.
Profile name Displays the unique name of the profile

that describes the characteristics of the
object, such as additional properties,
behaviors, or requirements.
8. Click OK.

131
4.6 Configuring an MP Series Controller Current Input Point

Current Input Point
You configure MP Series controller current inputs to represent where the points are
119.
To configure an MP Series controller current input point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller current input point.

132


• Unforce. Displays a forced value.
release the value.
• Force. Displays a non-forced value.
Click to force the value. For
example, the present value is
measured from 0 to 20mA.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.

Digital filter Select True to filter out noise and prevent

false readings.

be sent.
Minimum value Enter the lowest value that can be reliably

derived for the Value property.
Maximum value Enter the highest value that can be

reliably derived for the Value property.

133
Continued
Electrical scale top Type a top of the range voltage (VDC),

current (mA), or resistance (kohm) value
for the input point scale. (Example: 10
VDC, 20 mA, or 60 kohm).
Electrical scale bottom Type a bottom of the range voltage,

(VDC), current (mA), or resistance (kohm)
value for the input point scale. (Example:
0 VDC, 0 mA, or 0 kohm)
Engineering scale top Type a top of the range engineering value

for the input point scale. (Example: 100%)
Enginering scale bottom Type a bottom of the range engineering

0%).
Offset Type an offset value to be added to or

subtracted from the engineering value
before it impacts the Value property.




analog value.

8. Click OK.

134
4.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Input Point

Digital Input Point
You configure MP Series controller digital inputs to represent where the points are
physically wired to the MP Series controller onboard I/O module
119.
To configure an MP Series controller digital input point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller device digital input point.

135


realease the value.
example, the displayed present
value is either On or Off.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.

Polarity Select Normal or Reverse to control the

relationship between the physical state of
the point and the Value property. When
Out of service is set to False, the
Polarity property causes a change to the
Value property.
Inactive text Type the text that explains the Inactive

state of the value, such as Idle. This text is
used as an enumeration text for the Value
property and related priority array values.
This text is visible in graphics, in the
Watch pane, and in the Properties pane.

136
Continued
The default is Inactive.
Active text Type the text that explains the Active

state of the value, such as Running. This
text is used as an enumeration text for the
Value property and related priority array
values. This text is visible in graphics, in
the Watch pane, and in the Properties
pane. The default is Active.




analog value.

8. Click OK.

137
4.8 Configuring an MP Series Controller Resistive Input Point

Resistive Input Point
You configure MP Series controller resistive inputs to represent where the points
are physically wired to the MP Series controller onboard I/O module.
119.
To configure an MP Series controller resistive input point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller device resistive input point.

138


realease the value.
example, it displays the resistance
measured between 0 and 65535
ohms. The module resistive input
range is from 0 to 15000 ohms.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.

Digital filter Type an offset value to be added to or


be sent.


139
Continued




Engineering scale bottom Type a bottom of the range engineering

0%).





analog value.

8. Click OK.

140
4.9 Configuring an MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Point

RTD Temperature Input Point
You configure MP Series controller Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)
temperature inputs to represent where the points are physically wired to the MP
Series controller onboard I/O module
119.
To configure an MP Series controller RTD temperature input

point
2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller RTD temperature input point.

141


release the value.
example, the present value displays
the converted temperature value in
degrees including the user-specified
wiring resistance and offset ranging
from -50 to 150°C.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.

Sensor type Select the specified sensor type to

determine how the resistance value is
converted to temperature.

false readings.

be sent.

142
Continued







analog value.

8. Click OK.

143
4.10 Configuring an MP Series Controller Supervised Input Point

Supervised Input Point
You configure MP Series controller supervised inputs to represent where the points
119.
To configure an MP Series controller supervised input point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller supervised input point.

144


release the value.
example, the present value displays:
On, Off, Trouble, or Not set.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.

Supervised circuit type Select one of the following: Not set,

None, NO Series, NC Series, NO
Parallel, NC Parallel. NO
Series/Parallel, or NC
Series/Parallel (NO= normally open,
NC= normally closed).
Supervised resistor value Type the value or use the up and down
arrow keys to enter the resistance value
of the resistors in the supervised circuit.

145




analog value.

8. Click OK.

146
4.11 Configuring an MP Series Controller Temperature Input Point

Temperature Input Point
You configure MP Series controller temperature inputs to represent where the
points are physically wired to the MP Series controller onboard I/O module.
119.
To configure an MP Series controller temperature input point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller temperature input point.

147


realease the value.
example, the present value displays
the converted temperature value in
degrees including the user-specified
wiring resistance and offset ranging
from -50 to 150°C.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.

Thermistor type Select the appropriate thermistor type

from the list.
With the SmartX Living Space
Temperature Sensor, be sure to select
the thermistor type Thermistor 10k
Type 1 (Continuum), even if this sensor
is a 10k Type 3 thermistor. The SmartX
Living Space Resistive Temperature
Sensor is the exception here. While

148
Continued
SmartX Sensors are usually connected to
the sensor bus, the SmartX Living Space
Resistive Temperature Sensor is
connected to the MP Series controller
temperature input.

false readings.

be sent.







analog value.

8. Click OK.

149
4.12 Configuring an MP Series Controller Voltage Input Point

Voltage Input Point
You configure MP Series controller voltage inputs to represent where the points are
119.
To configure an MP Series controller voltage input point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller voltage input point.

150

Value Displays an orange button if the

Associated value is not configured. When
configured, displays the current value for
the point under the following conditions:
• Unforce: Displays a forced value.
release the value.
• Force: Displays a non-forced value.
Click to force the value.
For all BACnet inputs, a Forced condition
is the same as out of service. For more
information, see the Forced Values topic
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.




point.


false readings.

be sent.

151
Continued





0%).





analog value.

8. Click OK.

152
4.13 Creating an MP Series Controller Output Point
4.13 Creating an MP Series Controller Output

Point
You create output points to represent where these points are physically wired to the
MP Series controller onboard I/O module.
119.
To create an MP Series controller output point

where you want to create the output point.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Point.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select the output point.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the output point.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the output point.
7. Click Next.
from the external BACnet device.
12. Click Next.
13. In the Terminal box, click the ellipsis button.
14. In the Select Object dialog box, select the Onboard IO terminal.
Important
No onboard IO terminals display in this dialog box when the output
point you are creating for the MP Series controller is not supported
by the available terminal types.
15. Click Select.

16. In the Trend log box, click the ellipsis button.
17. In the Create Object wizard, in the Name box, type a name for the trend
log.
18. In the Description box, type a description for the trend log.

153
4.13 Creating an MP Series Controller Output Point
19. Click Next.

22. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the trend log.
23. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the trend log
24. Click Create and then click Create again.

154
4.14 Configuring an MP Series Controller Current Output Point

Current Output Point
You configure MP Series controller current outputs to represent where the points
119.
To configure an MP Series controller current output point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller current output point.

155


release the value.
on WebHelp.
Electrical value Displays the raw, electrical value of the

output point (that is, the driven current
output value (0-20mA)).

WebHelp.

from the physical output. Out of service is
commandable.



Electrical type Displays the electrical type of the output.


be sent.

156
Continued
used for the Value property.

reliably used for the Value property.




0%).




analog value.

8. Click the Command tab.


157
9. Edit the Command properties.

Relinquish default Enter the value to be used by the Value

property when all values in the priority
array are set to Null.
Active command priority Displays the priority level (1-16) currently

controlling the present value. The present
value is the highest priority with a non-Null
value.
Priority 6 This priority is reserved for timer-based

algorithms that are not currently
supported. (Read-only)
Priority x Enter a priority value or Null.
10. Click OK.

158
4.15 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Output Point

Digital Output Point
You configure MP Series controller digital outputs to represent where the points are
119.
To configure an MP Series controller digital output point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller digital output point.

159


release the value.
on WebHelp.

output point (that is, Engergized and
De-energized for single digital outputs
(relay and triac) including digital, digital
pulsed, and pulsed width modulated
outputs).

WebHelp.

commandable.
Reliabililty Displays the reliability of the point. For






160
Continued
Value property.






analog value.



161



value.

10. Click OK.

162
4.16 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Point

Digital Pulsed Output Point
You configure MP Series controller digital pulsed outputs to represent where the
119.
To configure an MP Series controller digital pulsed output

point
2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller digital pulsed output point.

163


release the value.
on WebHelp.

outputs).

WebHelp.

commandable.






164
Continued
Value property.

be sent.




analog value.




value.


165
10. Click OK.

166
4.17 Configuring an MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Point

Pulse Width Modulated Output Point
You configure MP Series controller Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output points to
provide a pulse train with a specific period and duty cycle. Depending on your
programming, you can implement PWM using either the duration or duty cycle
property to produce the same results.
119.
To configure an MP Series controller pulse width modulated

output point
2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller pulse width modulated
output point.

167


release the value.
on WebHelp.

outputs).

WebHelp.

commandable.




Value property.

168
Continued


be sent.
PWM scale Select the PWM scale parameter Duration

(s) or Duty cycle (%). For more
information, see the I/O Point Scaling
topic on WebHelp.
Period (s) Enter a period value. For example, a duty

cycle of 25% and a Period of 20 seconds
produces a 5 second pulse every 20
seconds (25% of 20 seconds = 5
seconds).
PWM minimum pulse (s) Enter a PWM minimum pulse. If the value
is on for less than the minimum pulse, the
value remains off.




analog value.



169

Relinquish default (s) Enter the value to be used by the Value


value.
Priority 6 (s) This priority is reserved for timer-based

Priority x (s) Enter a priority value or Null.
10. Click OK.

170
4.18 Configuring an MP Series Controller Tristate Output Point

Tristate Output Point
You configure MP Series controller tristate outputs to represent where the points
Tip
When configuring a tristate output, it is necessary to have two adjacent channels
free. After you pick the primary channel, the secondary channel is automatically
assigned to the adjacent (higher) channel. If the adjacent channel is not free for
assignment, the primary channel assignment fails with an error.
119.
To configure an MP Series controller tristate output point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller tristate output point.

171


release the value.
on WebHelp.

output point (that is, -On, Off, and On for
tristate and tristate pulsed outputs).
• -On always indicates that the first
relay/triac is de-energized and the
second (tristate partner) relay/triac is
energized
• On always indicates that the first
relay/triac is energized and the
de-energized
• Off always indicates that both
relays/triacs are de-energized

WebHelp.

commandable.




172
Continued
Value property.





analog value.



173



value.

10. Click OK.

174
4.19 Configuring an MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Point

Tristate Pulsed Output Point
You configure MP Series controller tristate pulsed outputs to represent where the
119.
To configure an MP Series controller tristate pulsed output

point
2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller tristate pulsed output point.

175


release the value.
on WebHelp.

energized
relay/triac is energized and the
de-energized

WebHelp.

commandable.




176
Continued
Value property.


be sent.




analog value.



177



value.

10. Click OK.

178
4.20 Configuring an MP Series Controller Voltage Output Point

Voltage Output Point
You configure MP Series controller voltage outputs to represent where the points
119.
To configure an MP Series controller voltage output point

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller voltage output point.

179


release the value.
on WebHelp.

output point (that is, the driven voltage
output value (0-10V)).

WebHelp.

commandable.





be sent.

180
Continued





0%).




analog value.



181



value.

10. Click OK.

182
5 MP Series Controller Value
Objects
Topics
MP Series Controller Value Objects
Creating an MP Series Controller Value Object
Configuring an MP Series Controller Analog Value
Configuring an MP Series Controller DateTime Value
Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Value
Configuring an MP Series Controller Multistate Value
Configuring an MP Series Controller String Value
MP Series Controller Reliability
MP Series Controller External Bindings
Creating an MP Series Controller External Binding
Configuring an MP Series Controller Consumer Value
Configuring an MP Series Controller Producer Value
Binding Value and Priority Properties in an MP Series
Controller
5 MP Series Controller Value Objects
5.1 MP Series Controller Value Objects

You create one of the following values in an MP Series controller:
• BACnet analog value
• BACnet datetime value
• BACnet digital value
• BACnet string value
• BACnet multistate value
MP Series controller value objects are storage locations in the memory of the
controller. There are five types of MP Series controller value objects, each of which
stores a unique value type:
• Analog values store numeric information.
• Digital values are used as control system parameters that have only one of two
possible states, Active (enabled) or Inactive (Disabled).
• DateTime values store date and time information used in schedules and
timestamps.
• String values contain plain text that can include messages that are displayed to
an operator.
• Multistate values are also used as control system parameters. However, their
values can be any one of a set that you define. For example, you can create a
multistate value object named Day of Week with a value of Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, or Sunday.
5.1.1 MP Series Controller Reliability

Reliability specifies the reliability of the Value property or the operation of the MP
Series controller object.
For more information, see section 5.8 “MP Series Controller Reliability ” on page
203.
5.1.2 MP Series Controller External Bindings

You create external bindings to directly exchange object property values between
the MP Series controller and other compatible BACnet devices without
communicating through the EcoStruxure BMS server.
For more information, see section 5.9 “MP Series Controller External Bindings” on
page 205.

185
5.1.3 Binding Value and Priority Properties in an MP

Series Controller
When binding an MP Series controller output or value’s Value property to a target
(that is, allowing the property to read the value from the target), do not attempt to
simultaneously bind both the value and priority array properties of the same MP
For more information, see section 5.13 “Binding Value and Priority Properties in an
MP Series Controller” on page 212.

186
5.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Value Object
5.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Value

Object
You create value objects in the MP Series controller to act as storage locations in
the controller’s memory.
185.
To create an MP Series controller value object

where you want to create the value object.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Value.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select the value object.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the value object.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the value object.
7. Click Next.
10. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the value.
11. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the value
from the hosted BACnet device.
12. Click Create.

187
5.3 Configuring an MP Series Controller Analog Value

Analog Value
You configure analog values to store numeric information for the MP Series
controller. MP Series controller value objects are storage locations in the controller’s
memory.
185.
To configure an MP Series controller analog value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller analog value.
5. For Value, click the Configure button .


188
6. Edit the properties.

Type Displays the object type. Read-only
Unit Select the Unit check box and enter the unit that matches
the unit of the point on the I/O module of the SmartX server.
For more information, see the Units topic on WebHelp.
Init value Displays the initial value, if defined. Read-only.
Reference Enter the Value property of the point that you want to
reference.
Forceable Indicates that the value is forcible if the check box is editable.
For more information, see the Forced Values topic on
WebHelp.
Retain level Select how to handle values for warm start, cold start,
system events, and system activities. For more information,
see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.
7. Click OK to return to the Basic tab.

8. In the Value box, enter the value to be used as a control system parameter for
the device.
9. In the Out of service box, select False.
10. In the COV increment box, enter the minimum change in the Value
property that causes a COV notification to be sent.



analog value.



189



value.

15. Click OK.

190
5.4 Configuring an MP Series Controller DateTime Value

DateTime Value
You configure DateTime values to define a combined date and time in an MP Series
controller.
185.
To configure an MP Series controller DateTime value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller DateTime value.
5. Click the Configure button for the Value property.


191
6. Edit the Properties.

reference.
WebHelp.


release the value.
on WebHelp.

BACnet value. For more information, see
WebHelp.

commandable.

192




analog value.

11. Click OK.

193
5.5 Configuring an MP Series Controller Digital Value

Digital Value
You configure digital values as control system parameters that have only one of two
possible states: Active (enabled) or Inactive (disabled).
185.
To configure an MP Series controller digital value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller digital value.
5. Click the Configure button for the Value property.


194
6. Edit the Properties.

reference.
WebHelp.


195


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the value. For






196
Continued




analog value.
Profile Displays the unique name of the profile

11. Click OK.

13. Edit the command properties.

Active command property Displays the priority level (1-16) currently

value.


197
5.6 Configuring an MP Series Controller Multistate Value

Multistate Value
You configure an MP Series controller multistate value to define a control system
parameter for an EcoStruxure BMS server.
185.
To configure an MP Series controller multistate value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller multistate value.

198


release the value.
on WebHelp.
State 1 Click and select the state you want to

create.

WebHelp.

commandable.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the value. For





199




analog value.

8. Click OK.
10. Edit the command properties.

Active command property Displays the priority level (1-16) currently

value.


200
5.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller String Value

String Value
You configure a string value to hold plain text that can include messages displayed
to an operator in an MP Series controller.
185.
To configure an MP Series controller string value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller string value.

release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.


201
5.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller String Value




analog value.
8. Click OK.

202
5.8 MP Series Controller Reliability

Reliability specifies the reliability of the Value property or the operation of the MP
You can use the Minimum and Maximum value property of the MP Series
controller analog inputs, outputs, and values to reflect the Reliability of the point.
Note
Analog input points have a BACnet type of analog-input, and include counter,
voltage, current, resistive, temperature, RTD temperature, and airflow input
points.
Analog output points have a BACnet type of analog-output and include current,
damper, voltage, digital pulsed, tristate pulsed, and PWM output points.
Figure: Minimum and maximum value property

The Minimum and Maximum value of MP Series controller analog inputs, outputs,
and values behave as follows:
• The Minimum value and Maximum value default to 0. When the Minimum value
and Maximum value are 0 or equivalent, reliability over-range and under-
range conditions are not assessed. If there are no prevailing fault conditions,
reliability is no-fault-detected.

203
• If the value of the point is greater than the Maximum value (and the Minimum
and Maximum value are not equivalent), reliability is set to over-range.
• If the value of the point is greater than the Minimum value (and the Minimum
and Maximum value are not equivalent), reliability is set to under-range.
For more information, see the BACnet Reliability Property topic on WebHelp.

204
5.9 MP Series Controller External Bindings

the MP Series controller and other compatible BACnet devices without
communicating through the EcoStruxure BMS server.
Within the MP Series controller, most objects exchange values as follows:
• With other objects in the same MP Series controller such as from a Script
program to an output point, or an input point to a trend log
• With objects in the MP Series controller parent EcoStruxure BMS server such
as these:
– A trend log to an extended trend log on the server
– An input point on the MP Series controller to a graphic on the server
– A schedule on the server to an output point on the MP Series controller
5.9.1 Value Exchange

Like other EcoStruxure Building Operation objects, you use a binding to exchange
values between the bound objects in the direction you specify during the binding
process. Normally, if an MP Series controller wishes to exchange values with
another MP Series controller or other compatible BACnet devices, the values must
travel through the proxies in the EcoStruxure BMS server.
There are still those cases, however, in which an MP Series controller must
exchange values directly with another MP Series controller without having to pass
the values through the EcoStruxure BMS server. In such cases, external bindings
are invaluable. This is particularly true in environments that do not include an
EcoStruxure BMS server such as those that employ a third-party system. External
bindings help facilitate direct peer to peer communication in such environments. For
example, if MP Series controller1 requires a temperature value from MP Series
controller2, it can utilize an external binding to directly exchange that temperature
value without communicating through the server. In addition, in those networks
where an EcoStruxure BMS server is present, you can utilize an external binding to
lighten the burden of inter-MP Series controller traffic on that server.
5.9.2 Types of External Bindings

There are two different types of external bindings: a producer and a consumer.
These types contain a number of different data types of their own such as analog,
digital, and multistate types. The producer and consumer bindings are independent
solutions and are not used in pairs. As a result, you do not need a consumer and a
producer to transfer a value. Depending on your needs, you select one of them and
then bind or reference to an object with a corresponding data type. You can
configure the binding reference directly in the Basic tab of the object or through the
Bindings pane in EcoStruxure BMS.
Information about an external device (including the Device ID, Network ID and MAC
Address) is added to the Device Address Bindings tab when you configure an
external binding object to reference an external device.

205
Consumer Configuration
You can configure the consumer in either of these increments:
• Polling: time interval based
• Change of value (CoV): value increment based
You can configure the consumer CoV as either confirmed or unconfirmed. A setting
also exists for a CoV resubscription interval that is fixed to half the subscription
lifetime.
For more information, see section 5.11 “Configuring an MP Series Controller
Consumer Value” on page 208.
Producer Configuration
You configure the producer as a CoV with a Guarantee write interval. The producer
then maintains a list of references for all of the object properties to which it writes.
Thus, a single producer can write to multiple objects. You can also also reset the
priority at which the producer writes in the destination object.
Note
The priority applies to all objects in the list. The exception to this is when the
property in the reference is a Priority Array element. In that case, the reference
contains an implied priority, which overrides the priority applied to the list of
references.
For more information, see section 5.12 “Configuring an MP Series Controller

Producer Value” on page 210.

206
5.10 Creating an MP Series Controller External Binding

External Binding
MP Series controllers without communicating through the EcoStruxure BMS server.
page 205.
To create an MP Series controller external binding

where you want to create an external binding.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click External Bindings.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select the consumer or
producer value.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the consumer or producer value.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the consumer or producer
value.
7. Click Next.
8. In the BACnet basic settings page, click Download to BACnet device
and then manually enter an Instance ID, or click Automatically generated
to have the system generate the ID for you.
Once created, be aware that you cannot change the object’s Instance ID.
9. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the consumer or
producer value.
10. Click Upload from BACnet device if you want to upload the properties of
the value from the hosted BACnet device.
11. Click Create.

207
5.11 Configuring an MP Series Controller Consumer Value

Consumer Value
When you configure a consumer value with an analog, digital, or multistate data
type, you bind or reference to an object with a corresponding data type. You then
configure the consumer value as either polling with a time interval base, or change
or value (CoV) with a value increment base.
page 205.
To configure an MP Series controller consumer value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller analog, digital, or multistate
consumer value.

208
5.11 Configuring an MP Series Controller Consumer Value
5. In the Input binding reference box, click the ellipsis button and then select
the binding reference.
Tip
It is recommended that you establish references to external objects
and their properties here since using the Bindings pane in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software to establish these
references may result in undesired behavior.
6. Configure the consumer value as either polling with a time interval base, or
change or value (CoV) with a value increment base.
• In the Poll interval box, enter time values in days, hours, minutes and
seconds to configure a time interval base.
• In the COV increment box, enter a value to configure a value increment
COV base.
7. In the Subscription type box, click to configure the COV as either
Confirmed-COV or Unconfirmed-COV.
8. In the COV resubscription interval (s) box, enter the number of seconds
to set the frequency of the subscription renewals.
Tip
In order for COV to track the timeout for a subscription, you must set
the time on both the EcoStruxure BMS server and MP Series
controller. Otherwise, COV-based external bindings do not function
correctly.
9. Click OK.

209
5.12 Configuring an MP Series Controller Producer Value

Producer Value
You configure the producer with an analog, digital, or multistate data type as a
change of value (CoV) with a Guaranteed write interval. The producer then
maintains a list of references for all of the object properties to which it writes.
page 205.
To configure an MP Series controller producer value

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller analog, digital, or multistate
producer value.

210
5.12 Configuring an MP Series Controller Producer Value
5. In the Output binding list reference box, click to add a new output
binding list reference or a corresponding data type.
Tip
It is recommended that you establish references to external objects
and their properties here since using the Bindings pane in
EcoStruxure BMS to establish these references may result in
undesired behavior. Be sure also to directly reference the value of the
reference object and not the command priority array.
6. In the Priority for writing box, enter a priority for writing the referenced
properties. 1 is the highest priority and 16 is the lowest.
7. In the Guaranteed write interval box, enter optional values to ensure a
value transfer occurs after a specified time period even if the CoV increment
has not been reached
8. Click OK.

211
5.13 Binding Value and Priority Properties in an MP Series Controller
5.13 Binding Value and Priority Properties in

an MP Series Controller
When binding an MP Series controller output or value’s Value property to a target
(that is, allowing the property to read the value from the target), do not attempt to
simultaneously bind both the value and priority array properties of the same MP
Tip
This rule applies only to MP Series controller outputs and values.
For example, should you create a (read) binding from the Value property of Digital
Output to the Value property of Digital Value.
Figure: Binding from the value property

Then, attempt to create a second read binding from Priority 16 with a reference
object of Digital Value 2.
Figure: Binding from priority 16

Should you then attempt to save the binding, you receive a binding error.

212
5.13 Binding Value and Priority Properties in an MP Series Controller
Figure: Binding save error
Tip
The binding target is anything that EcoStruxure BMS allows, such as another
value’s object property. Also, the properties that contain the binding can be read
by anything, including graphics.

213
6 Programming Languages for
MP Series Controllers
Topics
Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers
Creating an MP Series Controller Script Program or Function
Creating an MP Series Controller Function Block Program
Creating an MP Series Controller Control Loop
6 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers
6.1 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers
6.1 Programming Languages for MP Series

Controllers
Unique to the industry, the MP-C provides both Script and Function Block
programming options. This flexibility assures that you have the best programming
method available for your application.
When determining which programming language to use, consider the following
questions:
• Does the customer have a preference?
With some projects, the customer may specify the type of programming
environment to use. This is usually the result of prior experiences and familiarity
with a certain environment.
• Is your application library based on Script or Function Block?
It is always easier to reuse existing and proven programs. Furthermore, your
programmers may be more familiar with one language than the other.
• Which programming language best addresses the application?
In some cases, the programming language does not support a function that
the other does. While the majority of the application may include Function
Block programs, you may find it necessary to create one program using Script
to address a gap in functionality.
Table: Differences between Script and Function Block programming environments

Language Differences
Script Performs operations on BACnet commands,

like ReadProperty and Relinquish
Allows you to use a Scripting language like
Plain English (PE)
Function Block Provides a more intuitive language

Allows you to view the data flow and see
how items are connected
With the Script and Function Block Editors, when you save a program and the MP
Series controller is online, that program is automatically sent down to the controller.
6.1.1 Example Program

This Script programming example includes a simple fan control program that turns
a fan on or off based upon occupancy, which is, in turn, based upon a schedule.

217
6.1 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers
Figure: Sample MP Series controller Script program

For more information, see section 6.2 “Creating an MP Series Controller Script
Program or Function” on page 219.
For more information, see section 6.3 “Creating an MP Series Controller Function
Block Program ” on page 220.
6.1.2 Script Program Considerations

When writing MP Series controller Script programs, consider the following:
• Neither Script keywords applicable to Web Services or buffered variables are
supported.
• When configuring BACnet priority level access, you cannot use the full path
name of an object directly. Instead, you must declare a program binding
variable and bind it to a specific priority level property. For more information,
see the Configuring BACnet Priority Level Access in Building Operation and MP
Series Controller Script Programs topic on WebHelp.
• When you save a program or function, it downloads itself along with any other
objects that require a download (dirty objects) in the same controller. The
Script Editor provides progress information regarding download failures if any
occur during the save.

218
6.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Script Program or Function
6.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Script

Program or Function
You create MP Series controller Script programs or functions to import existing
program code or functions for an EcoStruxure BMS server using the Script Editor.
To create an MP Series controller Script program or function

where you want to create the Script program or function.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Program.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select the MPx Script
Program or MPx Script Function.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the MPx Script program or function.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the MPx Script program or
function.
7. Click Next.
10. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the program or function.
11. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the program
or function from the external BACnet device.
12. Click Create.
Now, you can open the MP Series controller Script program or function and enter
program instructions.

219
6.3 Creating an MP Series Controller Function Block Program

Function Block Program
You create an MP Series controller function block program to import existing
program code or to program new logic for the EcoStruxure BMS server using the
Function Block Editor.
To create an MP Series controller function block program

where you want to create the function block program.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select MPx Function
Block Program.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the MPx function block program.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the MPx function block
program.
7. Click Next.
10. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the program.
11. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the program
12. Click Create.
Now, you can open the MP Series controller function block progam and enter
program instructions.

220
6.4 Creating an MP Series Controller Control Loop

Control Loop
You create an MP Series controller loop so you can then configure a control loop for
an EcoStruxure BMS server.
For more information, see the Control Loops topic on WebHelp.
To create an MP Series controller control loop

where you want to create the control loop.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select Control loop.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the control loop.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the control loop.
7. Click Next.
10. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the control loop.
11. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the control
loop from the external BACnet device.
12. In the Priority for writing box, enter a priority at which the referenced
properties are commanded.
Value 1 is the highest priority and 16 is the lowest.
13. Click Create.

221
7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend
Logs for MP Series Controllers
Topics
Schedules for MP Series Controllers
Creating an MP Series Controller Calendar
Creating an MP Series Controller Schedule
Alarms for MP Series Controllers
Creating an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm
Configuring an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm
Configuring an MP Series Controller System Alarm
Creating an MP Series Controller Notification Class
Configuring an MP Series Controller Notification Class
Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers
Extended Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers
7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers
7.1 Schedules for MP Series Controllers
7.1 Schedules for MP Series Controllers

The MP Series controller provides you with flexibility in where you create and
execute your schedules. You can create either local or remote schedules with
advantages to each of these locations.
For example, if a single controller is using (and not sharing) a schedule, it makes
sense to create and have it reside locally. This ensures its reliability when using
schedules to configure occupancy and other events for equipment or direct output
control of rooms, lights, and fans. In such instances, the local schedule continues to
operate, even if communication is lost.
Tip
Ensure that BACnet calendar objects reside in the same device as schedule
objects.
Having schedules reside locally also has the benefit of reducing network traffic. By
contrast, having the schedule reside on the network means that it can be shared on
multiple devices. This is particularly advantageous if you are running low on memory
in the MP Series controller.
Note
Local schedules are always BACnet schedules, while remote schedules are either
BACnet or EcoStruxure Building Operation schedules. Local schedules are also
more efficient when used with shared applications.
Execution Type Interoperable No remote Multi-device

with
dependency Efficiency
BACnet
(Reliability)
Local BACnet
Remote BACnet
EcoStruxure
BMS
Basically, schedules for MP Series controllers are used in the same way as other
BACnet devices in EcoStruxure BMS. While the MP Series controller supports
Analog, Digital, Enumerated and Multistate schedules like other BACnet devices, it
does not support Integer and Boolean schedules with common calendar
references. For more information, see the BACnet Schedules topic on WebHelp.

225
7.2 Creating an MP Series Controller Calendar

Calendar
You create a calendar to specify exception dates, date ranges, or calculated dates
in an MP Series controller. Then, you only reference the calendar to each of the
schedules. This way, you only specify all the exception dates once.
For more information, see the Calendars in WorkStation topic on WebHelp.
To create an MP Series controller calendar

where you want to create the calendar.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Calendar.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the the Object type list, select Calendar.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the calendar.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the calendar.
7. Click Next.
13. Click Create.
Now, you can add dates, date ranges, or calculated dates to the calendar.

226
7.3 Creating an MP Series Controller Schedule

Schedule
You create an MP Series controller schedule to control the state of an analog,
digital, enumerated, or multistate schedule.
For more information, see section 7.1 “Schedules for MP Series Controllers” on
page 225.
To create an MP Series controller schedule

where you want to create the schedule.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Schedule.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Object type list, select the schedule.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the schedule.
6. In the Description box, type a description for the schedule.
7. Click Next.
13. Click Create.
Now, you can add events to the schedule and bind it to a specified value.

227
7.4 Alarms for MP Series Controllers

You can create local alarms to monitor variables against alarms conditions. These
alarms can alert an operator or group of their status based on a wide set of
notification and required response options, such as custom alarms view messages,
acknowledgement, email notification, graphics launching, cause notes, audio
playback and check lists.
For example, in an MP Series controller, you can set the temperature in a room and
then trigger an alarm if the temperature falls below or exceeds that point. Alarms
originating from external sources, such as BACnet networks, are handled and
displayed like other EcoStruxure Building Operation alarms.
7.4.1 BACnet Setup and Configuration

MP Series controller alarms utilize a BACnet setup and are configured with alarm
and notification objects. MP Series controller alarms only support algorithmic
alarms using a BACnet alarm and do not support intrinsic alarms. For more
information, see the BACnet Alarms topic on WebHelp.
Execution Type Interoperable with No remote
BACnet dependency
(Reliability)
Local BACnet
algorithmic
Remote EcoStruxure BMS

algorithmic
7.4.2 System Alarms

System alarms in the MP Series controller include the following:
• Program Cyclic Dependency Alarm: Triggered when a number of programs
and other application objects are bound so that the bindings for value transfer
form a cyclic dependency (mutually dependent loop). In such cases, the value
has no definitive starting point.
For more information, see section 19.4 “MP Series Controller Program
Bindings Cyclic Dependency” on page 664.
• Program Execution Overrun Alarm: Triggered when a program (or multiple
programs) is unable to fulfill all operations within the specified task time.
Typically, program execution for a given time slot falls more than 10 samples
behind before this alarm displays.
For more information, see section 19.5 “MP Series Controller Program
Execution Overrun” on page 665.
• Port State Change (Link-up/Link-down) Alarm: Indicates that there is a change
in the port state.

228
• Topology Change Alarm: Displays when there is a fault or a broken topology

link. This alarm is informational and requires no user intervention since broken
links are repaired automatically in MP Series controllers.
7.4.3 Offline Alarm and Event Buffering

When the MP Series controller is offline, the generated alarms and events are
buffered in the device. Buffering occurs until the device can confirm delivery.
When communication is restored, alarms and events are delivered to the
parent/host server as follows. All alarms are delivered in timestamp order with the
oldest alarms delivered first. These alarms persist through power failures and any
buffered alarms are fully decorated in EcoStruxure BMS on delivery (full data).
The MP Series controller buffers a minimum of 100 alarms and events with:
• First offline transitions for each, to-alarm, to normal, to-fault
• Most recent offline transitions for each, to-alarm, to normal, to-fault

229
7.5 Creating an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm

BACnet Alarm
You create a BACnet alarm in the MP Series controller as part of the process of
creating an algorithmic alarm for a monitored variable. After you create the alarm,
you use WorkStation to configure the alarm for the monitored variable.
228.
To create an MP Series controller BACnet alarm

where you want to create a BACnet alarm.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Alarm.
4. In the alarm type list, click BACnet alarm.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the alarm.
6. In the Description box, type a description.
7. Click Next.
8. Click Download to BACnet device.
10. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the alarm. Do not type a
name if you want a name to be assigned for you.
11. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the alarm
12. Click Create.

230
7.6 Configuring an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm

BACnet Alarm
You configure a BACnet alarm to indicate if an alarm message needs to be sent in
an MP Series controller.
228.
To configure an MP Series controller BACnet alarm

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller BACnet alarm you want to
configure.
3. On the File menu, click Open.
4. Click the Alarm Trigger tab.
5. In the Alarm Type box, select the alarm type.

231
6. Edit the alarm trigger properties.

Alarm type Select the type of alarm you want to

trigger when the monitored variable
meets the conditions defined in the
BACnet alarm.
Upper limit Enter a value that the Monitored

variable is required to exceed in order to
trigger the alarm and generate the event
notification.
Lower limit Enter a value that the Monitored

variable is required to fall below in order
to trigger the alarm and generate the
event notification.
Deadband Enter a range that is an offset from the

low-level and high-level limits, which
defines the range where a to-normal
event can be generated. To generate a
to-normal event, the value must be above
the low limit and below the high limit,
minus the deadband. For generic objects,
this property is present only in analog
objects from external devices that
support intrinsic reporting.
Time delay (s) Enter the number of seconds that you

want the system to wait before triggering
the alarm as defined by the Upper limit
and Lower limit values. The Time
delay is also used to determine when to
clear the alarm based on the Upper
limit, Lower limit, and Deadband
values.
Monitored variable Choose the method for referencing the

property that you want to monitor:
• Select System reference to define
a path-based reference to an object
or property that is currently located
on the EcoStruxure BMS server.
• Select BACnet reference to
define a reference that uses the
elements of a property value (Device
instance number, Object type, or
Object instance number) to identify a
BACnet object or property that is not
currently on the EcoStruxure BMS
server but may be uploaded or
imported to the server later. You can
also use this method to reference a
BACnet object or property on an
external device.
The system automatically fills in the
Device instance number, Object type, or
Object instance number for the reference
path, if available.

232
Continued
BACnet notification Choose the method for referencing the

intrinsic alarm object that you want to use
to generate event notifications. For more
information, see the BACnet References
and System References topic on
WebHelp.
7. Click Save.

233
7.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller System Alarm

System Alarm
You configure a system alarm to indicate if an alarm message needs to be sent in
an MP Series controller. System alarms include the following:
• Program Cyclic Dependency Alarms
• Program Execution Overrun Alarms
• RSTP Port State Alarms
• RSTP Topology Change Alarms
228.
To configure an MP Series controller system alarm

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller system alarm you want to
configure.
4. Click the Alarm Trigger tab.

234
7.7 Configuring an MP Series Controller System Alarm
5. Edit the alarm trigger properties.

Alarm Type Displays the alarm type.
Time delay (s) Enter the number of seconds required for

the alarm conditions to last before the
BACnet Notification is sent.
Alarm Trigger Type Displays Active/Inactive to indicate

whether one or both states act as alarm
triggers.
Displays Value list to indicate whether a
value or list of values should be compared
to the Monitored variable before a
change of state occurs, and an alarm is
triggered.
Trigger alarm when signal is equal Select the state that indicates when to
to trigger the alarm if Active/Inactive
displays in the Alarm trigger type.
Monitored variable Displays System reference as a

monitored variable. This property is fixed
and cannot be used to define a path-
based reference to an object or property.

intrinsic alarm object that you want to use
to generate event notifications. For more
information, see the BACnet References
and System References topic on
WebHelp.
6. Click Save.

235
7.8 Creating an MP Series Controller Notification Class

Notification Class
You create a notification class to help determine what devices to notify when a
transition from one event state to another has occurred, such as a to-normal event
has transitioned to a to-fault event.
228.
To create an MP Series controller notification class

where you want to create the notification class.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Alarm.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the alarm type list, select Notification
Class.
5. In the Name box, type a name for the notification class.
6. In the Description box, type a description.
7. Click Next.
8. In the BACnet basic settings page, click Download to BACnet device
and then manually enter an Instance ID, or click Automatically generated
to have the system generate the ID for you.
Once created, be aware that you cannot change the object’s Instance ID.
9. In the BACnet name box, type a BACnet name for the notification class.
10. Click Upload from BACnet device if you want to upload the properties of
the notification class from the external BACnet device.
11. Click Create.

236
7.9 Configuring an MP Series Controller Notification Class

Notification Class
You configure an MP Series controller notification class to define a device recipient
for the notification, prioritize event handling, and specify whether
acknowledgements for the notication class are required.
228.
To configure an MP Series controller notification class

2. In the List View, select the MP Series controller notification class you want to
configure.
4. Click the Presentation tab.
5. In the Category and Category 2 boxes, enter the alarm category (if any) of
the alarms that you want to reference the notification class.
6. Type a prefix that is added to the beginning of the source name property of the
alarm record.
7. Select Auto-hide to automatically hide the alarm in the Alarms pane or Alarm
View.
8. Select the alert type that the system will use when the alarm is triggered.
9. Select Disable state-change logging to prevent an alarm state change
from creating an event.
10. Click Save.

237
7.9 Configuring an MP Series Controller Notification Class
11. Click the User Action, Attachment, and Device Recipient tabs to finish
configuring the notification class. For more information, see the Configuring a
BACnet Notification topic on WebHelp.

238
7.10 Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers
7.10 Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers

You use a trend log to collect data and then store the records. A record contains a
log value or an event as well as its time stamp and an optional comment. A trend
log can log an analog variable, a digital variable, or an integer variable.
For more information, see the Trend Logs topic on WebHelp.
In an MP Series controller, you may create a local BACnet trend log to monitor
temperature input values in an area of a building. Trending a value locally in the MP
Series controller provides improved reliability and better network performance since
the storage of a trend log record only depends on the available memory and not
network connectivity. Therefore, it does not impact the network load. However, if
the MP Series controller is nearing its recommended maximum capacity, then you
can use remote trending at the server level.
For more information, see the Log Record Storage topic on WebHelp.
7.10.1 Log Views

You can configure log views in an EcoStruxure BMS server to visualize the log data
graphically or as a list. While these views reside in the EcoStruxure BMS server, you
can logically create them in the same location as the MP Series controller in the
System Tree.
Note
BACnet trend logs in MP Series controllers are used in the same way as trend
logs in other SmartX devices.
7.10.2 Trend Log Storage Guidelines

When dealing with trend logs, consider the following:
• MP Series controllers support at least two trend logs per onboard I/O point and
hosted SmartX Sensor I/O point when you configure each trend log to support
at least 5 days of records with an interval of 15 minutes (480 records).
• All trend log records are stored locally and persist through warm start, cold
start, and power cycles.
• You can optionally back up all trend logs to a host server using the extended
trend logging feature.
• Each controller can support a maximum of 60,000 total trend log records
distributed across all configured trend log objects.
Note
Based on the size and quantity of other objects in the control application, you
may have fewer trend logs with more records, or more trend logs with fewer
records than these guidelines specify.

239
7.11 Extended Trend Logs for MP Series Controllers
7.11 Extended Trend Logs for MP Series

Controllers
You use an extended trend log to store log records for long periods of time without
encumbering the MP Series controller memory. The extended trend log is often
saved on an EcoStruxure BMS server with more storage capacity. This extra
storage capacity enables the EcoStruxure BMS server to store more records before
overwriting the old ones.
BACnet trend logs either stop or overwrite data when full, if larger record sets are
required. The extended trend logs you create in EcoStruxure BMS servers with
more memory can store more records before overwriting the old ones. Extended
trend logs only overwrite when full, however, since there is no option to stop an
extended trend log when capacity is reached. Log archiving is an option for storage
of records beyond the configured limits of the extended trend logs.
You configure extended trend logs differently depending on whether you are
configuring:
• MP Series controller (BACnet) trend logs in the controller
• EcoStruxure Building Operation trend logs that can link to MP Series controller
resident points and values
• EcoStruxure Building Operation extended trend logs that can link to MP Series
controller resident trends
For more information, see the Extended Trend Logs topic on WebHelp.
Table: MP Series Controller Trend Log Options

Trend log options Runs on Maximum records
Local BACnet trend log MP Series controller MP Series controller limit

For more information, see the
Architectural Guidelines 2.0.0
topic on WebHelp.
Trend log Server SmartX AS-P

Server/Enterprise Server limit
For more information, see the
Architectural Guidelines 2.0.0
topic on WebHelp.

240
8 SmartX Sensors
Topics
SmartX Sensors
SmartX Sensor Display Object
Creating a SmartX Sensor
Configuring a SmartX Sensor
SmartX Sensor Operation and Calibration Modes
Configuring a SmartX Sensor Object
Configuring a SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object
Configuring a SmartX Sensor Display Object
8 SmartX Sensors
8.1 SmartX Sensors
8.1 SmartX Sensors

SmartX Sensors are a family of living space sensors designed for MP Series
controllers using the EcoStruxure Building Operation user interface. These sensors
use an RJ-45 sensor bus that provides communication and power from the MP
Series controller.
The sensors are modular and are ordered in two parts: the sensor base and the
cover. Four SmartX communicating sensor base models are available as well as six
covers. Typically, you can match any base unit containing temperature, carbon
dioxide (CO2), and humidity sensor objects with any combination of front covers
including varied button counts, occupancy sensors, and displays.
The exception here is the LCD Temperature Sensor which includes its own unique
sensor base and cover. You cannot interchange it with other covers or bases. See
the SmartX Living Space Sensor Button and Occupancy Covers Installation
Instructions for more detailed information about SmartX Sensor buttons and covers.
The maximum number of SmartX Sensors you can connect to an MP Series
controller depends on the selected combination of cover and sensor base types.
The limit also depends on whether an eCommission Bluetooth Adapter is
connected to the sensor. For more information, see the Architectural Guidelines
2.0.0 topic on WebHelp.
Important
The maximum total length of the sensor bus is 61 m (200 ft).
8.1.1 Models
SmartX Sensors include blank cover and occupancy sensor-only cover models, as
well as several models with pushbutton or display-driven user interfaces that allow
you to control temperature, occupancy, overrides, and a variety of other settings in
a designated living space.
Figure: SmartX Sensor models

243
8 SmartX Sensors
8.1 SmartX Sensors
3-Button Cover Model

The 3-Button Cover model contains a passive, infrared sensor for occupancy
detection and a plus and minus buttons to adjust the temperature setpoint. There is
also an occupancy override button should the room occupant wish to confirm their
presence, turn on the lights, and change the setpoint to a comfortable level.
For more information, see section 9.1 “SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model” on
page 269.
LCD Temperature Sensor Model

The LCD Temperature Sensor model is the relatively inexpensive, mid-range model
with a small LCD display and three buttons to increment (plus), decrement (minus)
and then select options (middle button) as you scroll through its menus.
For more information, see section 10.1 “SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor
Model” on page 277.
Touchscreen Display Model

The Touchscreen Display model provides a menu-driven interface with a main
menu and an optional default or home screen configurable through EcoStruxure
Building Operation.
For more information, see section 11.1 “SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display
8.1.2 Display Object

Both the MP-C and MP-V provide an interface designed for SmartX Sensor objects
supporting motion, temperature, humidity, and carbon dioxide. You can log on to
the parent EcoStruxure BMS server to engineer, commission, supervise, and
monitor MP Series controllers and I/O as well as their attached SmartX Sensors. As
part of these efforts, you can use the SmartX Sensor Display object in the
EcoStruxure BMS server to view, manipulate, and configure the UI features of the
various sensor models within your control application.
For more information, see section 8.2 “SmartX Sensor Display Object ” on page
247.
8.1.3 Firmware Upgrade

The SmartX Sensor upgrade process is automatic since its firmware is part of the
same package you use to upgrade the MP Series controller. That firmware package
includes 3 overall files: the I/O board, the CPU board and the SmartX Sensor. Each
individual MP Series controller is responsible for upgrading its own SmartX Sensor.
Should you decide to replace or swap a SmartX Sensor, the new unit is
automatically loaded with the last MP Series controller firmware package resident in
the controller. The MP Series controller saves that file and re-uses it when a SmartX
Sensor is replaced.

244
8 SmartX Sensors
8.1 SmartX Sensors
8.1.4 Replacement
When replacing a SmartX Sensor, you can replace the sensor with any model of the
same family. The MP Series controller recognizes the model and communicates
with the replacement device. Additionally, if you decide to replace a temperature
and CO2 sensor and then later decide to replace only the temperature sensor, the
MP Series controller still operates with only the temperature sensor. Any application
written to use the CO2 sensor is affected, however, since the replacement unit
causes EcoStruxure Building Operation objects representing the CO2 sensor to be
configured as out of service.
Note
It is the sensor object that is out of service here and not the entire SmartX Sensor.
When replacing a SmartX Sensor, be sure to check the DIP switch address to
ensure that the system recognizes the fitted unit as replacement for one you
removed. Otherwise, the MP Series controller does not interact with the same unit.
In order for the new unit to assume the identity of the old one, the DIP switch
settings must match.
During the replacement process, you can swap the faceplate on the sensor model if
you want. Even if the model sensor types and faceplate do not match, EcoStruxure
BMS still assumes it is the same unit and configures any absent or deficient sensors
or displays objects as out of service.
8.1.5 Addressing
When the MP Series controller requires more than one SmartX Sensor, be sure to
adjust the DIP switches of the devices to unique settings. You should also ensure
that at least two switches are present to provide the four unique settings the
product requires. The following table shows the mapping between each unique DIP
switch setting and SmartX Sensor addressing. The default setting for both DIP
switches is OFF.
SW1-1 SW1-2 Address
OFF OFF 1
OFF ON 2
ON OFF 3
ON ON 4
Tip
Setting more than one SmartX Sensor to the same address (including not
changing the factory default DIP switch setting) produces an error and results in a
communication failure to any units sharing that address.

245
8 SmartX Sensors
8.1 SmartX Sensors
8.1.6 Operation and Calibration Modes

The CO2, temperature, humidity, and occupancy SmartX sensors provide a variety
of operation and calibration options.
For more information, see section 8.5 “SmartX Sensor Operation and Calibration
Modes” on page 255.

246
8 SmartX Sensors
8.2 SmartX Sensor Display Object

Both the MP-C and MP-V provide an interface designed for SmartX Sensor objects
supporting motion, temperature, humidity, and carbon dioxide. You can log on to
the parent EcoStruxure BMS server to engineer, commission, supervise, and
monitor MP Series controllers and I/O as well as their attached SmartX Sensors. As
part of these efforts, you can use the SmartX Sensor Display object in the
EcoStruxure BMS server to view, manipulate, and configure the UI features of the
various sensor models within your control application.
8.2.1 Display Object Property Tabs

The Display object includes a Basic tab with the same General Information you
find on all EcoStruxure Building Operation objects. Beyond that, it also provides a
Setpoint, a Fan speed, an Occupancy override, an HVAC mode, a Heating
cooling status, and 4 Custom value text fields.
Figure: SmartX Sensor Display object properties - basic tab

The Advanced tab in the Display object provides considerably more configuration
information. For example, you enable the temperature setpoint feature by setting
the Display object Allow setpoint changes property to On and configuring the
Setpoint high limit and Setpoint low limit properties. If colored wall back
lighting feedback is required for the room occupant, you can turn on the Enable
wall back lighting property.

247
8 SmartX Sensors
Note
Allow setpoint changes, Setpoint high limit, and Setpoint low limit are the types of
properties you may wish to drive dynamically based on time of day. For example,
you only allow setpoint changes during the day and not at night. You might drive
that from the schedule. You may also only change the high and low limits for the
setpoint based on whether you are in the heating or cooling season.
Figure: SmartX Sensor Display object properties - advanced tab

You can also enable the occupancy override feature using the Display object Allow
occupancy override property. In the Occupied mode, you then turn on a green
back light if the Enable wall back lighting property is On.
For more information, see section 8.8 “Configuring a SmartX Sensor Display
Object” on page 262.
8.2.2 SmartX Sensor and Display Object Property

Mapping
While the Display object allows you to configure varied SmartX Sensor models with
different UI features, not all of these properties apply to each model. Be sure to
consider this when configuring the application and binding it to your control
programs. The table that follows shows the properties applicable to each unit.

248
8 SmartX Sensors
Table: SmartX Sensor and Display Object Property Mapping

Display object Touchscreen LCD Temperature 3-Button Cover
property Display Sensor
Setpoint Yes Yes Yes
Fan speed Yes Yes No
Occupancy override Yes Yes Yes
HVAC mode Yes Yes No
Heating cooling Yes Yes No

status
Show time Yes No No
Time format Yes No No
Show CO2 Yes Yes No
Show humidity Yes Yes No
Temperature units Yes Yes No
Allowed fan speeds Yes Yes No
Enable wall back No No Yes

lighting
Allowed HVAC Yes Yes No

modes
Allow setpoint Yes Yes Yes

changes
Setpoint high limit Yes Yes Yes
Setpoint low limit Yes Yes Yes
Allow fan speed Yes Yes No

changes
Allow occupancy Yes Yes No

overrides
Allow HVAC mode Yes Yes No

changes
Allow menu pages Yes No No
Allow HVAC mode Yes Yes No

changes
Allow menu page Yes No No
Allow information Yes No No

pages

249
8 SmartX Sensors
Continued
Display object Touchscreen LCD Temperature 3-Button Cover
property Display Sensor
Allow temperature Yes Yes No

unit changes
Display backlight Yes No No
SmartX Living Space Yes Yes Yes

Sensor / Eco mode

250
8 SmartX Sensors
8.3 Creating a SmartX Sensor
8.3 Creating a SmartX Sensor

You create a SmartX Sensor offline and then associate the proxy with the sensor
hardware.
To create a SmartX Sensor

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, select IO Resources under the
MP Series controller.
2. Select Sensor bus.
3. On the File menu, point to New and then click Room Unit Device.
4. In the Create Object wizard, in the Name box, type a name for the SmartX
Sensor.
5. In the Description box, type a description for the SmartX Sensor.
6. Click Next.
10. Click Upload from BACnet device to upload the properties of the SmartX
Sensor from the external BACnet device.
11. Click Create.
12. In the File menu, click Properties.
13. In the Basic tab, in the Address box, click the Configure Settings icon .
14. In the Address dialog box, in the Value box, select the DIP switch address
that coincides with the device you want to associate with (that is, the address
set previously in the SmartX Sensor physical device).
15. Click OK.

251
8 SmartX Sensors
8.4 Configuring a SmartX Sensor

You configure a SmartX Sensor to associate that sensor with a physical MP Series
controller.
To configure a SmartX Sensor

and then select IO Resources.
2. Click Sensor bus.
3. In the List View, select the SmartX Sensor.

252
8 SmartX Sensors

System status Displays Operational when the SmartX

Sensor is operating correctly.
Address Click the DIP switch address that

corresponds to the address set previously
in the SmartX Sensor physical device.
Base model Identifies the base model.
Cover model Identifies the cover model.
Firmware version Displays the revision of the firmware

currently running in the SmartX Sensor.
Application software version Displays the current version of the

application software that is installed on
the SmartX Sensor.
Serial number Displays the serial number of the SmartX

Sensor.
Commissioning tool enable Click Off to send a message to the

SmartX Sensor to disable communication
with the eCommission SmartX Controllers
tool through the SmartX Sensor
connection. For security purposes, you
should ensure this property is always
turned off, except during the controller
commissioning operations (or phase).
To prevent it from being inadvertently or
maliciously turned on, you can configure
an MP Series controller BACnet Change
of state alarm using the property as the
monitored variable. This will send an
alarm message to the controller. For more
information, see section 7.6 “Configuring
an MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm”
on page 231.
Commissioning tool detected Detects the presence of a commissioning

tool.
Eco mode Click On to set the EcoMode system

heating or cooling status.


253
8 SmartX Sensors




analog value.

9. Click OK.

254
8 SmartX Sensors
8.5 SmartX Sensor Operation and Calibration Modes
8.5 SmartX Sensor Operation and

Calibration Modes
The CO2, temperature, humidity, and occupancy SmartX sensors provide a variety
of operation and calibration options.
• CO2 sensor: Provides several calibration methods including the following:
– Normal
– Zero Calibration
– Background Calibration
– Automatic Baseline Calibration Mode
See the SmartX Living Space Sensor Base Installation Instructions for more
information.
• Temperature sensor: Allows you to adjust temperature using the Calibration
offset property in the EcoStruxure BMS (if needed). For more information, see
section 8.6 “Configuring a SmartX Sensor Object” on page 256.
SmartX sensor models without any buttons or a touchscreen do not allow such
adjustments.
See the SmartX Living Space LCD Temperature Sensor Installation Instructions
for more information on selecting modes and changing temperatures.
• Humidity sensor: Provides no calibration offset for you to modify. Instead, the
offset is used to store a non-volatile calibration constant.
• Occupancy sensor: Detects the presence of people in a room. The sensitivity
of the sensor applies to the degree of its response to those people. You use
this feature to change a setpoint or initiate other control elements.
See the SmartX Living Space Sensor Button and Occupancy Covers
Installation Guide for more information.

255
8 SmartX Sensors
8.6 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Object

You configure the SmartX Sensor to calibrate the mode for the CO2 (carbon
dioxide) sensor object and offset values for the temperature and humidity sensor
objects.
To configure a SmartX Sensor object

2. Expand Sensor bus.
3. Select Room Unit Device.
4. In the List View, select CO2, Temperature, or Humidity.

256
8 SmartX Sensors


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the object. For


Calibration mode Select the calibration mode for the carbon

dioxide sensor object.
Calibration offset
Enter a calibration offset for the
temperature and humidity sensor objects.


257
8 SmartX Sensors




analog value.

10. Click OK.

258
8 SmartX Sensors
8.7 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object

Occupancy Object
You configure the SmartX Sensor occupancy object to specify the sensitivity of the
occupancy sensor. Since the sensor detects the presence of people in a room, the
higher the sensitivity setting, the more likely it is to respond to their presence.
To configure a SmartX Sensor object

2. Expand Sensor bus.
3. Select Room Unit Device.
4. In the List View, select Occupancy.

259
8 SmartX Sensors


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.


Sensitivity Enter the sensitivity of the occupancy

sensor as a percentage, with 0% being
the lowest and 100% being the highest
sensitivity values.


260
8 SmartX Sensors




analog value.

10. Click OK.

261
8 SmartX Sensors
8.8 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Display Object
8.8 Configuring a SmartX Sensor Display

Object
You configure the SmartX Sensor display object to specify its initial display and
feature control settings.
Tip
Be sure to only show and/or allow changes if all room occupants are permitted to
view or change data in the SmartX sensor. If access is limited for some
occupants, be sure to disable those functions they are not allowed to access.
Access to certain functions should only be provided to clients based on their
roles.
To configure a SmartX Sensor display object

2. Click Sensor bus.
3. Click Room Unit Device.
4. In the List view, click Display.
Note
These properties allow the occupant of the room with the SmartX
Sensor to interact with the engineer's control program. Typically,
they are configured using Script or Function Block programs running
in the MP Series controller and then changed using the local display
(if permitted).

262
8 SmartX Sensors
Setpoint Enter a setpoint manually or use a Script

or Function Block program. You can also
view and configure this property using the
SmartX Sensor.
Fan speed Click to set the current fan speed or use a

Script or Function Block program. You
can also view and set this property using
the SmartX Sensor.
Valid options here include the following
states:
• Off
• Level 1-Low-On
• Level 2-High
• Level 3
• Auto
Occupancy override Click On to indicate that you want to

temporarily override the room controlled
by the SmartX Sensor to an occupied
state. The control program reacts to this
override and temporarily adjusts the
active setpoint for the room. (Writer's
Note: Need to check On/Off versus
Active/Inactive values).
HVAC mode Click to specify the desired HVAC

operating mode. Typically, this mode is
initialized by the control program and then
changed by the room occupant.
Valid options here include the following
states:
• Off
• Heat
• Cool
• Auto
Heating cooling status Specifies whether the system is currently

heating or cooling. Typically, the status is
driven by the control program in order for
the SmartX Sensor display to inform the
room occupant about the current state of
the system.
Valid options include the following values:
• Off
• Heat
• Cool
• Auto

263
8 SmartX Sensors

Note
You may choose to configure these properties and never change
them, or drive them dynamically from schedules or Script or Function
Block programs. For example, you may decide to allow HVAC mode
changes only during business hours.

264
8 SmartX Sensors



analog value.

Show time Displays the current time on applicable

SmartX Sensor models. (You cannot
change the time using the SmartX Sensor
display).
Time format Click to display the time format (either

24:00 or 12:00). The default setting is
24:00.
Show CO2 Click On to show the CO2 level. The

default setting is Off.
Show humidity Click On to show the humidity. The

Temperature units Click to configure the temperature units

(either Celcius or Fahrenheit) shown on
the SmartX Sensor display. The default
setting is Celcius.
You can change the units locally at any
time. However, they will revert back to
this original setting if the Display object is
saved again or the SmartX Sensor is
replaced.
Allowed fan speeds Click to specify fan speeds. Valid options

include:
• Off-On-Auto
• Off-Low-High-Auto
• Off-123-Auto
The default setting is Off-On-Auto.
Enable wall back lighting Click On to enable wall back lighting. The
Allowed HVAC modes Click to specify HVAC modes. Valid

options include:
• Auto
• Auto-Heat
• Auto-Cool

265
8 SmartX Sensors
Continued
• Auto-Cool-Heat
The default setting is Auto.
Allow setpoint changes Click On to allow setpoint changes. The

Setpoint high limit Enter a high limit for the setpoint. A Script
or Function Block program can drive the
Setpoint high limit to support different
ranges for cooling and heating modes.
Setpoint low limit Enter a low limit for the setpoint. A Script
or Function Block program can drive the
Setpoint low limit to support different
ranges for cooling and heating modes.
Allow fan speed changes Click On to allow fan speed changes. The
Allow occupancy overrides Click On to allow occupancy overrides.

The default setting is Off.
Allow HVAC mode changes Click On to alow HVAC mode changes.

Allow menu pages Click On to allow menu pages to display.

Allow information pages Click the page(s) to display the specified

information.
Allow temperature unit changes Click On to allow temperature unit

changes. The default setting is Off.
Display back light Click the specified back light setting. Valid
settings are:
• On
• Off
• On by motion
• On by touch
10. Click OK.

266
9 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover
Model
Topics
SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor 3-
Button Cover Model
LED Behavior in the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
Overriding the Occupancy Setting in a SmartX Sensor 3-
Button Cover Model
9 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
9.1 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model

The 3-Button Cover model contains a passive, infrared sensor for occupancy
detection and a plus and minus buttons to adjust the temperature setpoint. There is
also an occupancy override button should the room occupant wish to confirm their
presence, turn on the lights, and change the setpoint to a comfortable level.
Figure: SmartX Sensor 3-button cover model

For more information, see section 9.2 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a
SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model” on page 271.
For more information, see section 9.4 “Overriding the Occupancy Setting in a
Once you have changed the temperature setpoint, you can obtain data, such as the
setpoint the user asked for. You may also be interested in finding out about the
occupancy override mode and whether the user requested the room or zone be
occupied.
To discover these, you can do the following: (Make this list a separate
procedure?)
• Drag the Setpoint and Occupancy override properties to the Watch
Window and see how they behave.
• Change the occupancy mode by clicking the button on the unit.
Then, you will see the green light going on indicating the system is occupied
and that the occupancy override variable is now On. If you have a program
monitoring this, you can also see it is On. If your program is designed to time
out after a few seconds, it turns the light off when that time expires. If your
program is bound to the occupancy override variable, that is part of the overall
control application.
• Determine the actual setpoint by looking at the Watch Window.

269
You can see the setpoint incrementing every time you press the plus button on
the unit. The increments here are 1/10 of the total range. When you reach the
top, the red light does not get any brighter after a button push based on the
specified range. You can also see it does not increment beyond the upper end
of the range in the Watch Window.

270
9.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
9.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in

a SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
Change the temperature setpoint to increase living space comfort using the
available buttons in the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover model. You enable the
temperature setpoint by configuring the Display object Allow setpoint changes,
followed by the Setpoint high limit and Setpoint low limit properties. In this
way, you can use the desired setpoint to control applications through the Setpoint
property.
247.
To change the temperature setpoint in a SmartX Sensor 3-

Button Cover model
1. In the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model, press the button to

increase the temperature setpoint in the designated living space.
2. Press the button to decrease the temperature setpoint in the designated

living space.
Important
With each consecutive button push, the temperature setpoint
increases or decreases by 10% within the specified setpoint range.
Whenever possible, it is recommended that you set the range
relatively narrowly (+/- 10o) to avoid wide temperature swings. With
each button push, the back light also changes from deep blue at the
low end of the range, to deep red at the top end of the range. For
more information, see section 9.3 “LED Behavior in the SmartX
Sensor 3-Button Cover Model” on page 272.

271
9.3 LED Behavior in the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
9.3 LED Behavior in the SmartX Sensor 3-

Button Cover Model
When the room occupant presses the buttons on the SmartX Sensor 3-Button
Cover model to increase or decrease the temperature setpoint, the back light
changes from deep blue at the low end of the range, to deep red at the top end of
the range. Each button push increments or decrements in 10% increments of the
range. The back light LED flashes quickly three time to indicate the top or bottom of
range has been reached.
For example, should you press the button with a maximum setpoint of 75o, a
minimum setpoint of 65 , and a current setpoint of 68o, the back light LED is blue.
o
Each time you press the button, the LED becomes fainter and fainter. In addition,
the red LED gets brighter and brighter with each button push. If either the upper or
lower limits are reached, the LED blinks three times rapidly.
If you are unable to change the setpoint, the LED blinks three times rapidly in the
current setpoint color.
Figure: SmartX Sensor 3-button cover model LED behavior

272
9.4 Overriding the Occupancy Setting in a SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
9.4 Overriding the Occupancy Setting in a

SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
You override the living space occupancy setting so an after-hours occupant can
change the control setting to improve their comfort level, for example. You enable
occupancy override and also use the current occupancy value to control
applications using the Display object Allow occupancy override property.
247.
To override the occupancy setting in a SmartX Sensor 3-

Button Cover model
1. In the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model, press the button to override
the occupancy setting in the designated living space.
In the Occupied mode, a button press turns on a green back light if the
Enable wall back lighting property is On. However, if the Allow
occupancy overrides property is OFF, the LED does not respond to a
button press. For more information, see section 9.3 “LED Behavior in the
Tip
When Occupancy override is set to on by the room occupant
pushing the button, it remains on until the control application sets the
Occupancy override property to off.

273
10 SmartX Sensor LCD
Temperature Sensor Model
Topics
SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
Toggling Through the Menus on the SmartX Sensor LCD
Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor
LCD Temperature Sensor Model
Changing the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor LCD
Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings in a SmartX
Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
Changing the Degree Type in a SmartX Sensor LCD
Changing the Occupancy Mode in a SmartX Sensor LCD
10 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.1 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.1 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature

Sensor Model
The LCD Temperature Sensor model is the relatively inexpensive, mid-range model
with a small LCD display and three buttons to increment (plus), decrement (minus)
and then select options (middle button) as you scroll through its menus.
This model also contains an onboard temperature sensor that displays the current
temperature the living space occupant sees. The unit does not include humidity or
CO2 sensors. As a result, the Show CO2 and Show humidity properties in the
Advanced tab of the Display object are not applicable here. Since it does not
display time or the time format, the Show time and Time format properties are
also not applicable. Similarly, the Allow menu and Allow information pages
properties are invalid in this SmartX Sensor model. There is no display backlight
property, so the Enable wall back lighting property is also invalid.
Figure: SmartX Sensor 3-button display model
10.1.1 Display Object Setting Control

Using the Display object you can control the number of the settings the user sees in
the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model menus. For example, you can
configure valid HVAC modes in the Display object, such as Auto, Auto-Cool, or
Auto-Heat-Cool. You can also decide if you want to allow setpoint changes or not,
configure the high and low limits, and enable or disable fan speed changes.
Similarly, you can decide to allow or disallow occupancy overrides.
For more information, see section 10.2 “Toggling Through the Menus on the
SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model” on page 279.

277
10.1 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
For more information, see section 10.3 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a
For more information, see section 10.4 “Changing the Fan Speed in a SmartX
Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model” on page 283.
For more information, see section 10.5 “Changing Heating and Cooling Mode
Settings in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model” on page 285.
For more information, see section 10.7 “Changing the Occupancy Mode in a
For more information, see section 10.6 “Changing the Degree Type in a SmartX
Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model” on page 287.
10.1.2 Watch Window Property Monitoring

Once you configure the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model, you can
drag the setpoint, fan speed, occupany override, and HVAC mode properties in the
Display object Basic tab to the Watch Window to monitor them as they change.
For example, you may change the setpoint first. Notice that if you leave the units in
degrees F (as you change the setpoint), the data in the Watch Window is degrees
C. Once the data is in the system, it is converted to the format (setting) that the user
wants to see based on the specified preference in WorkStation.
If you change the fan speed to off, you should see that change in the Watch
Window. You should also see the occupancy override change too. If it is Off, set it
to Yes in the Display Object, let it time out, and the Watch Window should now say
On.

278
10.2 Toggling Through the Menus on the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.2 Toggling Through the Menus on the

SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model
You toggle through the menus in an LCD Temperature Sensor model to view and
change zone control settings such as temperature set point, fan speed, HVAC
mode, and occupancy override. On each menu, use the available buttons to
change the information on the page.
For more information, see section 10.1 “SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor
To toggle through the menus on the SmartX Sensor LCD

Temperature Sensor model
1. In the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor display, notice that the default
menu displays temperature.
The temperature icon is solid On or non-blinking.
2. Press the button once to advance the menu.

The display changes to show the fan speed setting page as indicated by the
solid fan icon.

279
10.2 Toggling Through the Menus on the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
3. Press the button once to advance the menu and show the
heating and cooling mode menu and its icons.
4. Press the button once to show the occupancy mode menu and its icon.
5. Press the button once to show the humidity menu and its icon.
6. Press the button once to show the Celsius and Fahrenheit menu and its
icon.
7. Press the button a final time to return to the initial temperature menu.

280
10.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model

a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model
Change the temperature setpoint to increase living space comfort using the
available buttons in the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model. You
enable the temperature setpoint by configuring the Display object Allow setpoint
changes, followed by the Setpoint high limit and Setpoint low limit
properties. In this way, you can use the desired setpoint to control applications
through the Setpoint property.
247.
To change the temperature setpoint in a SmartX Sensor LCD

1. In the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor, in the default temperature
menu, press the button.

The icon blinks to indicate that you are actively editing the temperature
setpoint.
2. In editing mode, press the or buttons to reach the desired

temperature setpoint.
Tip
The setpoint may differ from the actual temperature reading.
The icon continues to blink while you are in editing mode.


281
10.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
3. Wait for six seconds for the setpoint to return to temperature.

There is no confirm button, so the six seconds of inactivity is necessary to
execute your changes.
The icon returns to a normal, solid grey and the numbers now denote
temperature rather than setpoint.

282
10.4 Changing the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.4 Changing the Fan Speed in a SmartX

You change the fan speed in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model to
change the air flow in the designated living space. You enable this feature by
choosing the Display object Fan speed property and its appropriate setting, such
as Off, Level-1-Low-On, or Level-2-High.
Note
The specific setting depends on the type of fan located in your zone. Typically,
you only need to set this once because the zone equipment either does, or does
not include a fan. If it does, it only has so many speeds, further limiting the
available choices.
247.
To change the fan speed in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature

Sensor model
1. In the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor default temperature menu,
press the button to advance to the fan speed menu.

283
10.4 Changing the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
2. Toggle between one of the available fan speed options using the
button.
3. Use the button to toggle through the options backwards.
4. Select the desired speed and press the button to return to the default
temperature menu.
The also confirms your fan speed changes.
Tip
Should you return to the fan speed menu at some point, you will see
your selection displayed as the current fan speed.

284
10.5 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.5 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode

Settings in a SmartX Sensor LCD
You change the heating and cooling mode settings in a SmartX Sensor LCD
Temperature Sensor model to enhance living space comfort. You enable this
feature by choosing the Display object Heating cooling status property and its
relevant option.
247.
To change heating and cooling mode settings in a SmartX

Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model
press the button to advance to the heating and cooling mode menu.
2. Toggle between one of the available fan speed options using the
button.

285
10.5 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
4. Select the desired speed and press the button to return to the default
temperature menu.
The also confirms your fan speed changes.

286
10.6 Changing the Degree Type in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.6 Changing the Degree Type in a SmartX

You change the degree type to either Celsius or Fahrenheit in a SmartX Sensor LCD
Temperature Sensor model to view the temperature in the desired units. You enable
this feature by choosing the Display object Temperature units property and its
Fahrenheit or Celsius option.
247.
To change the degree type in a SmartX Sensor LCD

press the button to advance to the degree type menu.
2. Toggle between one of the available options using the button.
4. Select the desired degree type and press the button to return to the
default temperature menu.
This also confirms your degree type changes.

287
10.7 Changing the Occupancy Mode in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
10.7 Changing the Occupancy Mode in a

SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model
You change the occupancy mode in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor
model to to tell the control system that the room is occupied or unoccupied.
Depending on how the control system has been designed, it may respond by
permanently or temporarily changing the setpoint, fan speed, HVAC mode, and or
lights. You enable the occupancy override feature using the Display object Allow
occupancy override property.
247.
To change the occupancy mode in a SmartX Sensor LCD

press the button to advance to the occupancy mode menu.
2. Toggle between one of the available options using the button.


288
10.7 Changing the Occupancy Mode in a SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
4. Select the desired mode and press the button to return to the default
temperature menu.
The also confirms your occupancy mode changes.

289
11 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen
Display Mode
Topics
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor
Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted SmartX
Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
Configuring the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor
Configuring the Temperature Units in a SmartX Sensor
Changing the Occupancy Mode or Override in a SmartX
Changing the Unit View in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen
Display Model
Accessing and Viewing Submenus in a SmartX Sensor
11 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Mode
11.1 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
11.1 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display

Model
The Touchscreen Display model provides a menu-driven interface with a main
menu and an optional default or home screen configurable through EcoStruxure
Building Operation.
Using these screens, you can perform a variety of tasks including:
• Viewing menus and submenus
For more information, see section 11.8 “Accessing and Viewing Submenus in a
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model” on page 312.
• Adjusting the temperature
For more information, see section 11.2 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint in
a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model” on page 296.
• Changing occupancy mode or overrides
For more information, see section 11.6 “Changing the Occupancy Mode or
Override in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model” on page 306.
• Changing unit views
For more information, see section 11.7 “Changing the Unit View in a SmartX
Sensor Touchscreen Display Model” on page 309.
For more information, see section 11.5 “Configuring the Temperature Units in a
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model” on page 303.

293
Figure: SmartX Sensor touchscreen display model
11.1.1 Display Object

The vast majority of the properties in the Basic and Advanced tabs of the
Display object are valid for the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model,
including the setpoint, fan speed, occupancy override and HVAC mode. For
example, you can turn the time off on the Advanced page using the Show time
property. Once you save your choice, you can watch the time disappear on the
display. Similarly, you can switch from the 12-hour to the 24-hour format using the
Time format property. You can also turn off CO2 and humidity on the display’s
default screen. For more information, see section 12.3 “SmartX Sensor
Touchscreen Display Model- Default Screen” on page 319.
You can configure your specific fan type depending on the type of fan located in
your zone. Typically, you only need to set this once because the zone equipment
either does, or does not include a fan. If it does, it only has so many speeds, further
limiting the available choices.
For more information, see section 11.4 “Configuring the Fan Speed in a SmartX
Sensor Touchscreen Display Model” on page 300.

294
You can use the available options to configure the Display back light property.
For example, you can turn the light On by motion since it includes a motion
sensor, or you can configure it to turn On by touch, so that when someone
touches it, it wakes up and turns on. This is a property you may just configure once
or perhaps configure it based on the time of day since you may want the back light
turning on at night.
Note
There is no wall back lighting for the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display mode,
so the Enable wall back lighting property is not supported here.
11.1.2 Script Program Property Configuration

You can bind to the Display object properties and read them into your Script
programs. There are also properties that you might want to configure from your
Script programs. For instance, you can drive the heating and cooling status
indicator to show that you are actively heating or cooling and also animate the
background color of the display. Specifically, you may display a pink background
when actively heating and a blue background when actively cooling. Similarly, you
may want to drive the fan speed to show whether your program has overridden the
fan speed and if this is no longer what the user specified.
It can be difficult to drive a property from a program since reading and writing to a
program simultaneously can be challenging without overwriting objects. Be aware
that there is a a technique for waiting and then writing a null back so you do not
overwrite your objects.
(Can we include a sample program here?)
11.1.3 Menu Page

A unique feature in the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model is the menu
page which gives your user access access to information about the device. You
can also turn the Allow menu page property off in the Display object and prevent
users from accessing these information pages should you want. Indeed, this may
be a property you leave on for commissioning and then turn off when the job is
finished.
If you allow access to the information pages, you may want to limit access to one or
two of the pages by clicking the Allow information pages (Page 1, Page 2,
Page 3) property in the Display object.
(Writer's Note: Page 1, Page 2, Page 3 etc will be renamed in the next version of
the software. Page 1 will be Sensors, Page 2 will be called Device, Page 3 will be
Parent, and a new Page 4 will be called Custom because it will display the Custom
text strings in the device. There will also be individual properties so you can turn
each of them on and off in the display. You can do this programmatically or just
configure them once and set them).
Some of the information in these pages may be sensitive, so you may want to limit
its access. After the building has been commisionned and turned over, there may
be a perceive Cybersecurity risk issue with exposing this information. It may also be
important information that you do not want in the user’s hands. As a result, it is
recommended that you evaluate the information on these pages when you are
initially configuring the job and decide what may or may not wish to expose here.

295
11.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model

a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display
Model
You increase or decrease the temperature setpoint in a SmartX Sensor
Touchscreen Display model to enhance living space comfort.
To change the temperature setpoint in a SmartX Sensor

Touchscreen Display model
1. In the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen model, touch anywhere on the default
temperature display screen.
The setpoint displays.
2. Turn off the LED at the base of the unit to conserve power.
3. Click once for each full degree Fahrenheit and one-half a degree
Celsius of additional heat you want.
When clicked, the icon changes color if the response time is quick enough.
Tip
Waiting six seconds without any activity cancels the operation,
discrards your changes , and returns to the default screen.

296
11.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
4. Click to confirm your changes.

The default screen now illuminates red, the up arrow indicates temperature
direction, and the setpoint displays for positive feedback.
Once the desired temperature is reached, the backlight and LED turn off and
the arrow and setpoint are removed from the display screen.

297
11.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model

a Restricted SmartX Sensor
Should you be unable to perform any temperature adjustments, or permitted to do
so only in small increments (within +/- 3o), the Allow temperature unit changes
property in the SmartX Sensor Display object in EcoStruxure BMS may be turned
off. This property restricts your ability to change the temperature setpoint in the
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen model.
To change the temperature setpoint in a restricted SmartX

Sensor Touchscreen Display model
1. Touch anywhere on the default SmartX Sensor Touchscreen model
temperature display screen.
If the Lock icon displays and the temperature setting icons are greyed out, you
are unable to make any temperature setpoint changes. Although the setpoint
displays, you are unable to remove it by inadvertently assuming it is a
temperature reading.

298
11.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
2. Click to return to the main menu.
3. Press to return to the default temperature menu.

299
11.4 Configuring the Fan Speed in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
11.4 Configuring the Fan Speed in a SmartX

You configure the fan speed in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen model to provide the
desired air flow in the designated living space. (True?)
To configure the fan speed in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen

Display model
1. In the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model, touch anywhere on the
default temperature display screen.
2. In the temperature change screen, click to view the main menu.
3. In the main menu, click the fan speed icon (if permitted).
In the main menu, if you wait longer than six seconds before clicking, you are
returned to the default temperature display screen.

300
4. Click an inactive fan speed icon.

A lock icon displays to indicate that the Allow fan speed changes property
in the SmartX Sensor Display object in the EcoStruxure BMS server is turned
off.
You are not permitted to make fan speed changes.

301
5. In the fan states menu, toggle to the desired fan state. (True?)
After you toggle the desired fan state, the screen returns to the default. It also
returns to the default after six seconds of inactivity.

302
11.5 Configuring the Temperature Units in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
11.5 Configuring the Temperature Units in a

SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display
Model
You change the temperature units in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model
to see the temperature in the preferred units of the room occupant. You enable this
feature by choosing the Display object Allow temperature units property and its
Fahrenheit or Celsius option.
To configure the temperature units in a SmartX Sensor

3. In the main menu, click the degree type icon (if permitted).

303
4. Click an inactive temperature units icon.

A lock icon displays to indicate that the Allow temperature unit changes
property in the SmartX Sensor Display object in the EcoStruxure BMS server
is turned off.
You are not permitted to make temperature unit changes.


304
5. In the degree states menu, toggle to the temperature unit. (True?)
After you do so, the screen displays the new type and the new temperature
setting.

305
11.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode or Override in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
11.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode or

Override in a SmartX Sensor
You change the occupancy mode in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen model to...
(What do we need to say here?)
To change the occupancy mode or override in a SmartX

Sensor Touchscreen Display model
3. In the main menu, click the occupancy icon (if configured for an override).

306
4. Click an inactive occupancy mode icon.

A lock icon displays to indicate that the Allow occupancy overrides
is turned off.
You are not permitted to change the occupancy mode or there is no override
available.

307
5. In the occupancy states menu, toggle to the desired state. (True?)
After you do so, the screen displays the updated occupancy state and then
goes into its preconfigured override state.

308
11.7 Changing the Unit View in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
11.7 Changing the Unit View in a SmartX

You change the unit view such as the heating or cooling mode to enhance living
space comfort in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model. (OK??)
To change the unit view in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen

Display model
3. In the main menu, click the heating and cooling mode icon (if permitted).

309
4. Click an inactive heating and cooling mode icon.

A lock icon displays to indicate that the Allow HVAC mode changes
is turned off.
You are not permitted to change the heating and cooling mode.

310
5. In the heating and cooling mode menu, toggle to the desired mode. (True?)
After you do so, the screen displays the new type and setting.

311
11.8 Accessing and Viewing Submenus in a SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
11.8 Accessing and Viewing Submenus in a

SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display
Model
You access and view the submenus to obtain information about the SmartX Sensor
Touchscreen Display model and its settings.
To access and view submenus in a SmartX Sensor

3. In the main menu, click the information icon (if visible).
If the information icon is not visible, the Allow information pages Page 1-3
property in the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display object in the
EcoStruxure BMS server is turned off. You are not permitted to access the
information in the submenus.

312
4. View the first page in the information submenu.
Note
At any point in this procedure, if you wait longer than six seconds
before clicking, the default temperature display screen displays.
5. Click to display the next page in the information submenu.
6. Click to display the final page in the information submenu.

313
7. Click to return to the first page or to go to the previous page in the

information submenu.

314
12 SmartX Sensors User Interface
Topics
SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface
SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default
Screen
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Default Screen
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Temperature
Change Screen
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Main Menu
SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Submenus
12.1 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface

Interface
Use the SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover model interface to increase and decrease
temperature and perform occupancy overrides.
Figure: SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover model interface
Table: SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface

Button Description
Press to increase the temperature.
Press to override current occupancy

settings. (True?)
Press to decrease the temperature.

317
12.2 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default Screen
12.2 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature

Sensor Model- Default Screen
Use the SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model default screen to advance
through the menus, increase and decrease temperature, change modes and
degree types, and perform occupany overrides.
Figure: SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model- default screen
Table: SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default Screen

Button Description
Press to decrease the temperature.

Press to toggle backwards through menu
items, such as heating and cooling and
occupany modes.
Press to advance from the default menu

through items for heating and cooling and
occupancy, and changing humidity, and
Celsius and Fahrenheit degree types.
Press to increase the temperature.

Press to change the fan speed.
Press to toggle between heating and cooling
and occupied and unoccupied modes.

318
12.3 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Default Screen

Model- Default Screen
Use the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model default screen to view the
current settings and advance to the temperature change screen.
Figure: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model- default screen
Table: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Default Screen

Icon Description
Touch anywhere on the default screen. The

Temperature Change screen displays. For
more information, see section 12.4 “SmartX
Sensor Touchscreen Display Model-
Temperature Change Screen” on page 320.

319
12.4 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Temperature Change Screen

Model- Temperature Change Screen
When allowed, you can use the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model
temperature change screen to increase or decrease temperature and enhance
living space comfort.
Figure: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model- temperature change screen
Table: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Temperature Change Screen

Icon Description
Click to view the main menu. For more

information, see section 12.5 “SmartX
Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Main
Menu” on page 322.
Click to increase the temperature. Press

once for each full degree Fahrenheit and
one-half degree Celsius of additional heat
you want.
Click to decrease the temperature.

320
12.4 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Temperature Change Screen
Continued
Icon Description
Click to confirm your changes.

321
12.5 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Main Menu

Model- Main Menu
Use the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model main menu to perform a variety
of tasks including:
• Viewing menus and submenus
• Adjusting temperature and fan speed
• Changing occupancy mode or overrides
• Changing unit views
Figure: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen model- main menu
Table: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Main Menu

Icon Description
Click to return to the default or home screen.
Click to view submenus (whenever

applicable).

322
12.5 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Main Menu
Continued
Icon Description
Click to toggle between fan speeds.
Click to toggle between occupied and

unoccupied settings.
Click to also override current occupancy
settings.
Click to toggle between Fahrenheit and

Celsius degree settings.
Click to toggle between heating and cooling

mode.

323
12.6 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Submenus

Model- Submenus
Use the SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model submenus to obtain
information about the unit and its settings.
Figure: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display model- submenu (page 1)

324

325
Table: SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Submenus

Icon Description
Click to return to the main menu.
Click to display the next page in the

Click to display the previous page in the


326
13 eCommission SmartX
Controllers Tool
Topics
eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool
Configure the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Initial
Connection Workflow
eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Connection Options
13 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool
13.1 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

The eCommission SmartX Controllers tool is a mobile commissioning tool for MP
Series controllers that is supported across all major OS platforms. It is designed for
the configuration, maintenance, and commissioning of local MP Series controllers
or daisy chained MP Series controllers.
You use eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to perform these tasks:
• Configure IP and BACnet device settings
• Change the Ethernet switch mode
• Configure the system time (in standalone mode)
• Store and upload device common settings
• View status information
• Generate diagnostic reports
When the network infrastructure is not yet in place, you can also use eCommission
SmartX Controllers tool to perform a local application deployment by uploading the
control application and directing the local MP Series controller to utilize its
connected sensors and actuators and perform an I/O checkout. This ensures that
its I/O points are installed, wired, and operating correctly.
For more information, see section 2.9 “Performing a Field Deploy for an MP Series
Controller Application” on page 72.
Note
The eCommission SmartX Controllers tools are password protected. Their
password policy account information is maintained locally and not on the parent
13.1.1 Configure eCommission SmartX Controllers

Tool Initial Connection Workflow
Before you start using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool, you need to
configure the initial connection with the MP Series controller.
For more information, see section 13.2 “Configure the eCommission SmartX
Controllers Tool Initial Connection Workflow” on page 330.
13.1.2 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

Connection Options
You can connect to the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool using four different
methods.
For more information, see section 13.3 “eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool
Connection Options” on page 333.

329
13.2 Configure the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Initial Connection Workflow
13.2 Configure the eCommission SmartX

Controllers Tool Initial Connection
Workflow
Before you start using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool, you need to
configure the initial connection with the MP Series controller.
Use this workflow to configure that connection. Related information can be found in
the sections that follow the flowchart.
Figure: Configure eCommission SmartX Controllers tool initial connection workflow

330
Prepare the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

Install the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool, activate the software, and accept
the end user license agreement.
For more information, see the Installing and Activating the eCommission SmartX
Controllers Mobile Tool topic on WebHelp.
Log on and test the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

Log on and test the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to ensure it is
operational.
For more information, see the Starting the eCommission SmartX Controllers Mobile
Tool topic on WebHelp.
Power up the MP Series controller

Power up the MP Series controller.
For more information, see the Powering Up MP-C topic on WebHelp.
For more information, see the Powering Up MP-V topic on WebHelp.
Connect the Ethernet cables

Directly connect the Ethernet cables (CAT-6 is recommended).
• Connect the cable to the 10/100 Ethernet 1 port on the MP Series controller.
• Connect the other end of the cable to your PC.
For more information, see section 13.3 “eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool
Connection Options” on page 333.
Configure the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

Configure the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool with a DHCP address.
Tip
The eCommission SmartX Controllers tool does not require a static IP address.
You can configure it with a DHCP address without conflict. For more information,
see section 1.14 “ IP Address Assignment for MP Series Controllers” on page 49.
Log on to the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

Launch the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool and log on with an account that
contains Technician Tool privileges or higher.
For more information, see the Starting the eCommission SmartX Controllers Mobile
Tool topic on WebHelp.
Note
The eCommission SmartX Controllers tool has four user roles with the technician
role having the highest privileges. The electrician can perform I/O checkout, while
the flow balancer can perform balance operations. The technician can do both as
well as configure the controller. Finally, the administrator creates and manages
user accounts. For more information, see the eCommission SmartX Controllers
Mobile Tool Overview topic on WebHelp.

331
Discover the eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

Select the WiFi icon and then use Device Discovery to discover the eCommission
SmartX Controllers tool.
Load the MP Series controller application

Using the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool, load the MP Series controller
application.
For more information, see section 2.9 “Performing a Field Deploy for an MP Series
Controller Application” on page 72.

332
13.3 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Connection Options

Connection Options
You can connect to the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool using four different
methods.
13.3.1 Wired Direct

Connect the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool directly to an MP Series
controller using only a CAT5 or CAT6 cable.
Figure: Wired direct connection
13.3.2 Wired Network

Connect the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to the MP Series controller
network using a switch or connect the tool directly to an open Ethernet port on the
controller.
Figure: Wired network connection
13.3.3 WIFI Access Point

Connect the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to the MP Series controller using
a WIFI access point.

333
13.3 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool Connection Options
Figure: WIFI connection
13.3.4 eCommission Bluetooth Adapter and SmartX

Sensor
Connect the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool to a single MP Series controller
using a SmartX Sensor and the eCommission Bluetooth Adapter.
Figure: Bluetooth connection

You do not need to know the IP address of the eCommission SmartX Controllers
tool because it is not required for BACnet device discovery. For more information,
see the BACnet Device Discovery topic on WebHelp.
Note
• When the MP Series controller's Ethernet port 2 is not used by the controller
network, you can connect the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool using
that port without disruption or additional hardware. When the MP Series
controller's Ethernet port 2 is used by the controller network (for example, in a
daisy-chain or RSTP network topology), you can add a temporary switch or
hub to ensure that connectivity is maintained while the eCommission SmartX
Controllers tool are in operation.

334
14 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data
Object Configuration
Topics
Variable Air Volume Data Support and the MP-V
Air Flow and Flow Balancing
Viewing Stored Backup Data in an MP-V
Backing Up Flow Balance Data in an MP-V
Restoring Flow Balance Data in an MP-V
Performing Simultaneous Backups on Multiple MP-Vs
Variable Air Volume Data Objects
Cooling and Heating Control in a VAV Box
Configuring MP-V Analog Reheat
Configuring MP-V Box Flow
Configuring an MP-V Damper Command
Configuring MP-V Digital Reheat
Configuring MP-V Discharge Air Temp
Configuring an MP-V Effective Reheat Command
Configuring MP-V Fan Operation
Configuring MP-V Flow Balance Data
Configuring an MP-V Flow Setpoint
Configuring MP-V Velocity Pressure
Configuring an MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object
14 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Configuration
14.1 Variable Air Volume Data Support and the MP-V
14.1 Variable Air Volume Data Support and

the MP-V
The MP-V is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field controller
dedicated to supporting Variable Air Volume (VAV) Data applications. A VAV
terminal box provides a supply air stream at a constant temperature with a
modulated amount of air in order to serve a specified space.
The MP-V integrates a controller, a damper actuator, and an air flow sensor in a
single package for ease of installation. When coupled with a VAV terminal unit or
VAV box, the MP-V helps those devices provide zone-level flow control while
connected to either a local or a central control system.
Within VAV systems, control of the system's fan capacity is critical. Without proper
and responsive flow rate control, the system's ductwork or sealing, can easily be
damaged by over-pressurization. Under-pressurization can result in not enough
pressure to feed all of the required zones in the system. The Flow Balance Data
object in the MP-V contains parameters to prevent these problems by calibrating
the VAV box as measured by the box and the system airflow. For more information,
see section 14.2 “Air Flow and Flow Balancing” on page 338.
14.1.1 Air Flow and Flow Balancing

One of the challenges for VAV systems is providing adequate temperature control
for multiple zones with different environmental conditions, such as an office on the
glass perimeter of a building instead of an interior office down the hall.
14.1.2 Variable Air Volume Data Objects

The Variable Air Volume Data object is the container for the other VAV objects.
When you add this object in the MP-V, it contains children such as Velocity
Pressure, Box Flow, Damper Command that are required for eCommission SmartX
Controllers tool to work with the MP-V.
For more information, see section 14.7 “Variable Air Volume Data Objects” on page
345.

337
14.2 Air Flow and Flow Balancing

One of the challenges for VAV systems is providing adequate temperature control
for multiple zones with different environmental conditions, such as an office on the
glass perimeter of a building instead of an interior office down the hall.
Air flow or flow balancing is the process you use to measure and adjust the airflow
and temperature evenly throughout a building by either increasing or decreasing
airflow in specific rooms to improve occupant comfort.
When commercial forced air duct systems are not engineered or balanced to
properly distribute the air where it is needed, the result is that some rooms are too
hot and others too cold. With flow balancing, you can correct this problem by
systematically moving air around to increase your comfort level and improve the
efficiency of your HVAC system.
14.2.1 Flow Balance Data Object Calibration

The Flow Balance Data object in the MP-V contains parameters for calibrating the
VAV box as measured by the box and the system airflow. For example, the object
includes parameters like flow balance status, actuator rotation, and box measured
minimum, intermediate and maximum flows. For more information, see section
14.16 “Configuring MP-V Flow Balance Data” on page 377.
The MP-V utilizes these parameters when compensating for ductwork variations
and calibrating box pressures and airflows. You can view the current settings in a
report format. For more information, see section 14.3 “Viewing Stored Backup Data
in an MP-V ” on page 341.
14.2.2 Flow Balance Log and Report

There is a flow balance log produced by the MP Series controller that is available for
you to review. To access it, click Diagnostic Files, followed by Flow Balance
Log. A sample EcoStruxure Building Operation flow balance log is shown here.

338
Figure: Sample view flow balance log

In addition, there is a flow balance report that is created by the eCommission
SmartX Controllers tool. You do not access or display it through the MP Series
controller, however. Instead, you export this report from the eCommission SmartX
Controllers tool. For more information, see the Flow Balance Report topic on
WebHelp.
14.2.3 Flow Balance Data Backup and Restore

If the VAV controller is damaged or no longer functional, you can replace the box
and restore flow balance data easily. For more information, see section 14.5
“Restoring Flow Balance Data in an MP-V ” on page 343.
Tip
You can perform a simultaneous backup on multiple controllers by using the
Search list view feature in the EcoStruxure BMS. For more information, see
section 14.6 “Performing Simultaneous Backups on Multiple MP-Vs ” on page
344.

339
14.2.4 Flow Balance Data Backup and Restore

Guidelines
You use flow balance data backup and restore to protect data if a controller is
damaged and needs to be replaced. Follow these guidelines when using backup
and restore:
• Perform flow balance backup and restore after flow balancing and the device
have been hosted
Flow balance backup obtains the balance parameters from the controller’s flow
balance data object.
• Perform flow balance backup on multiple devices
• Apply flow balance restore to only one device at a time.
• Perform flow balance restore after a controller replacement in order to populate
the controller with data
Live data is protected in the controller and is retained after an application
download.
Important
Backup data can differ from the current data. After balancing, backup data is
captured to preserve that data should it be changed. In this way, the original data
stays safe, so it can always be retrieved.
You should use caution here, however, since you can bypass this process by
changing the live data and then performing a backup once more, thus overwriting
the previous backup. Do not backup data that is not from a valid flow balancing
procedure.

340
14.3 Viewing Stored Backup Data in an MP-V
14.3 Viewing Stored Backup Data in an MP-V

Within the MP-V, you can view VAV box stored backup calibration data in a report
format.
To view stored backup data in an MP-V

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the MP-V and then select
Application.
2. In the List View, double-click Variable Air Volume Data.
3. In the List View, select Flow Balance Data.
4. In the Actions menu, point to Flow balance data.
5. Click View stored backup data.
The flow balance stored backup data opens in a text editor, such as Notepad.
6. Click File and then Exit to close the report when finished.

341
14.4 Backing Up Flow Balance Data in an MP-V
14.4 Backing Up Flow Balance Data in an MP-

V
You can easily back up flow balance data in the MP-V in the event you may need to
replace the box and restore flow balance data. This is particularly useful if the VAV
controller is damaged or no longer functional.
Tip
Because this is a manual process, you should perform the flow balance data
backup soon after the EcoStruxure BMS server is installed and balancing is
complete.
To backup and restore flow balance data in an MP-V

Application.
5. Click Backup flow balance data.
A Progress view displays the status of the backup operation.
6. Click Close when finished.

342
14.5 Restoring Flow Balance Data in an MP-V
14.5 Restoring Flow Balance Data in an MP-V

You can easily restore flow balance data in the MP-V in the event that the VAV
controller is damaged or no longer functional. An immediate restore after a backup
should not be necessary.
To restore flow balance data in an MP-V

Application.
5. Click Restore flow balance data.
A Progress view displays the status of the restore operation.

343
14.6 Performing Simultaneous Backups on Multiple MP-Vs
14.6 Performing Simultaneous Backups on

Multiple MP-Vs
You can perform a simultaneous backup on multiple MP-Vs by using the Search list
view feature in the EcoStruxure BMS.
To perform simultaneous backups on multiple MP-Vs

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, select the Server.
2. In the search box, enter Flow Balance Data.
3. Click the Search button to display all of the flow balance data objects.
4. In the Search pane, multi-select all of the controllers in the list.
5. Click Actions.
6. Point to Flow balance data and click Backup flow balance data.
A Progress view displays the status of the backup operation.

344
14.7 Variable Air Volume Data Objects

The Variable Air Volume Data object is the container for the other VAV objects.
When you add this object in the MP-V, it contains children such as Velocity
Pressure, Box Flow, Damper Command that are required for eCommission SmartX
Controllers tool to work with the MP-V.
Because the MP-V is a BACnet device, the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool
identifies those objects by their BACnet identifier and then requires certain functions
for those objects to work. In particular, calibration data is required because it is
created and saved during the flow balancing process.
Figure: VAV objects
14.7.1 Physical Inputs and Outputs

A VAV box contains a physical input and an output. The input is the pressure
transducer that provides readings on how much air is flowing through the box. The
damper actuator controls the damper and regulates the airflow. On the pressure
transducer, the velocity pressure object includes terminal references to the pressure
transducer that feed into the box flow object. Velocity pressure is derived from the
pressure transducer. That information is then transmitted to the box flow and
provides a volumetric flow value, either CFM or liters per second.

345
Figure: VAV object inputs

On the output side, the damper command includes terminal references to the
damper actuator, which actually drives the damper. The velocity pressure, box flow,
and damper command objects are also included here along with the variable air
volume data object. The variable air volume data object serves as the parent for
these other objects and provides the central functionality to move from inputs to
outputs. Finally, the flow balance data object stores the calibration parameters used
by the variable air volume data object.
Figure: VAV object outputs
14.7.2 Flow Setpoint

Variable air volume data objects control the damper based on a flow setpoint
provided by other application objects, such as program objects. The flow setpoint is
the key because temperature control uses VAV boxes and the temperature of the
space is controlled by the amount of air flowing through the box. A given air
temperature is produced by the air handler and the volume of that air flowing
through the box is then used to control that temperature. The flow setpoint must
originate from somewhere and ultimately, it comes from the remainder of the
application.
The application includes the programs, alarms, schedules, and trends (that is,
everything required for control of the VAV box). The application engineer develops
the logic to control the temperature by varying the flow of air through the box.

346
Figure: VAV box control objects
14.7.3 Custom Controls

The added value that the Variable Air Volume Data objects provide is that control is
built-in and the controller is configured for any standard VAV control. At the same
time, however, the VAV controller can also accept any custom controls. Application
engineers are free to build their own control application that provides the same
capabilities as the VAV objects. For example, if application engineers want to use
their own control set, they must provide their own means of box calibration, or flow
balancing.
Important
Custom-built applications that do not use the Variable Air Volume Data object and
its children are not supported in the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool.
14.7.4 Objects for the eCommission SmartX

Controllers Tool
Five additional VAV objects are provided for the eCommission SmartX Controllers
tool because the controllers need to know the BACnet IDs of the objects in the
system. These objects are not provided for calibration because they provide only
ancillary functions. This includes the following functions:
• Analog reheat
• Digital reheat
• Effective reheat command
• Fan operation
• Discharge air temp
The Analog Reheat, Digital Reheat, and Fan Operation are provided for override
conditions, while the Discharge Air Temp and Effective Reheat Command are used
for monitoring. The Discharge Air Temp monitors the air temp and tells the test and
balancing agent if reheat is working. Specifically, it indicates if the Reheat Valve is
open, or if the electric reheat coil is electrified. The Effective Reheat command helps
identify whether the agent or something else is in control of the application.

347
Typically, when balancing agents are onsite, they do not simply inspect and
calibrate the VAV box, they also perform an entire checkout of the VAV control. As
part of this process, they may want to turn on the reheat, whether it is an analog or
digital reheat.
Note
If the box has an analog reheat control, it uses the analog reheat object, while it
uses the digital reheat object if it contains a digital reheat control.
Figure: VAV box control and objects for eCommission SmartX Controllers tool
14.7.5 Priority Levels

The eCommission SmartX Controllers tool uses commands at priority 7. Most
EcoStruxure BMS commands that may be considered overrides, such as force
commands, use the priority level of the EcoStruxure BMS which is typically, priority
level 8. Using priority 7 for the eCommission SmartX Controllers tool allows it to
have priority over typical force commands. If the eCommission SmartX Controllers
tool is online and balancing is taking place, the control level changes to 7 to control
that output directly.
As a safety feature, commands for eCommission SmartX Controllers tool are
released by the MP-V after the timeout period. While the additional eCommission
SmartX Controllers tool VAV object commands such as Flow Setpoint, Damper
Position Command, Analog Reheat Force, Digital Reheat Force, and Fan Operation,
all incorporate this behavior, a priority level 7 command to these objects (only)
applies the timeout regardless of where the command originates.
14.7.6 VAV Heating and Cooling Control

Along with the VAV objects provided by the controller, the application engineer
must build the cooling and heating control utilizing the following devices:
• Room sensor

348
• VAV discharge sensor

• Reheat valve
• Reheat relay
• Fan relay
For more information, see section 14.8 “Cooling and Heating Control in a VAV Box”
on page 350.

349
14.8 Cooling and Heating Control in a VAV Box
14.8 Cooling and Heating Control in a VAV

Box
When configuring cooling and heating control, the application engineer must
provide the following objects:
• Cooling control
• Heating control
• Reheat
• Reheat enable
14.8.1 VAV Cooling Control

Cooling control in a VAV controller requires a means to detect air flow (the Pressure
Transducer), a means to detect the temperature (the Room Temperature sensor),
and also a way to control the flow (Damper Actuator). All of the objects needed to
work with physical devices are contained in the Variable Air Volume Data object. It
acts as the container for all other VAV objects and provides the control not provided
by other objects.
Cooling control can be as simple as including an analog input object to provide the
temperature input and a loop object. The control signal that emerges here flows into
the Flow Setpoint object. The Flow Setpoint then receives that signal and sends it
on to the Variable Air Volume Data object.
Cooling control also requires a specialized analog command object, such as a
Damper Command. It receives a signal from the Variable Air Volume Data object,
controls the damper, and thus, completes a simple VAV cooling control. The
exception here is the Flow Balance Data object which stores all of the calibration
values performed while the flow balancer works on the VAV box.
All of the VAV objects in the following graphic are required. As shown, the simplicity
of the process is that you only need to add the two extra objects (analog input and
loop), and the binding.
Figure: VAV box cooling control

350
14.8 Cooling and Heating Control in a VAV Box
14.8.2 VAV Heating Control

Typically, the VAV box is cooling only. However, there a number of VAV boxes that
contain a heating coil or heating element. To heat the air, the VAV box needs to
detect the temperature in the room being controlled and also control the added
heat in the air. Oftentimes, this involves a Reheat Valve.
The application engineer uses the same analog input from the Room sensor and
adds another object such as a loop object, or a Function Block or Script program
object. The engineer also needs to add a control, such as an analog output object,
to direct the Reheat Valve. Alternately, the engineer may use Electric Reheat to
accomplish the same goal, except it includes a binary output object to control a
Reheat relay.
When the test and balance agent is working on a system, the agent needs a
mechanism for turning on the reheat and turning off the fan- if one has been
installed. The agent also needs to monitor the effects of the reheat. He or she can
do so by including several objects already built in to the Variable Air Volume Data
object. For example, an Analog Reheat object is a BACnet analog value that sits
between the heating control and the Reheat Analog Output. While Analog Reheat
operates and controls at Priority 7, the connection to the Analog Output is made at
Priority 16.
The balancing agent also needs to be aware of the actual command to the Reheat
Valve. The agent may have overridden the Reheat On. However, that does not
necessarily mean that the override is in control. As a result, another object is
included here to allow the agent to view the real control for the Reheat Valve.
Figure: VAV box heating control

351
14.9 Configuring MP-V Analog Reheat

You configure optional MP-V analog reheat if the VAV box has an analog type
reheat control. Analog reheat is not needed for flow balancing or control.
Note
Typically, field engineers use this object to allow the flow balancing agent to
perform overrides (or forces) of reheat control. The object is used only if the
engineer chooses to provide it to the balancer.
345.
To configure MP-V analog reheat

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the MP-
V and then select Application.
3. In the List View, select Analog Reheat.

352

Value Displays an orange button if the value is

not configured. When configured,
displays the current value for the point
under the following conditions:
release the value.
on WebHelp.
A Forced status may also include a
priority level setting for BACnet outputs
and values that are commandable. For
more information, see the Forced Priority
Level topic on WebHelp.
Force and Unforce commands are not
supported for BACnet objects that are
not commandable and do not have an
out of service property.

BACnet object. For more information, see
WebHelp.

commandable.




be sent.


353
Continued





analog value.




value.
Priority 7 When commanded at priority 7, the

command expires (returns to null) after a
configurable time in minutes. You
configure the time using the Flow
balance command timeout property.
For more information, see section 14.19
“Configuring an MP-V Variable Air Volume
Data Object ” on page 388.

354
11. Click OK.

355
14.10 Configuring MP-V Box Flow

You configure MP-V box flow to provide feedback for air volumetric flow. The
control application may use this value or it may be used for monitoring purposes.
345.
To configure MP-V box flow

3. In the List View, select Box Flow.

356


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.




be sent.

357




analog value.

9. Click OK.

358
14.11 Configuring an MP-V Damper Command
14.11 Configuring an MP-V Damper

Command
You configure an MP-V damper command to drive the damper. The command
obtains its control information from the VAV objects.
345.
To configure an MP-V damper command

3. In the List View, select Damper Command.

359


release the value.
on WebHelp.
Electrical value Provides the same value as Damper

position. (Remove this property?)
Damper position Displays the damper position as a

percentage of stroke. Upon power-up
and if the stroke is unknown, the actuator
drives fully closed, and then drives fully
open to determine the stroke.
During normal operation, the stroke is
recalculated automatically if someone
moves the damper end stops. With
damper stroke calculation, be sure to
consider the possibility that someone may
manually reposition the damper.

WebHelp.

commandable.



360
Continued

Recalibrate Select True to force the recalculation of

the Variable Air Volume data's damper
stroke value. The controller then turns
recalibrate to False when finished.
Typically, you should not need to set this
property since the controller relearns the
stroke through normal operation if it is
changed.
Electrical type Displays the electrical type.
Terminal Select the terminal reference. This object

only allows the use of the built-in damper
actuator named, Damper control1. Other
outputs are not allowed. If an external
actuator is needed a different analog
output object is necessary.

be sent.




361




analog value.




value.

11. Click OK.

362
14.12 Configuring MP-V Digital Reheat

You configure optional MP-V digital reheat if the VAV box has a digital type reheat
control. This object is not needed for flow balancing or control.
345.
To configure MP-V digital reheat

3. In the List View, select Digital Reheat.

363


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.





364
Continued





analog value.



365



value.

11. Click OK.

366
14.13 Configuring MP-V Discharge Air Temp

You configure optional MP-V discharge air temp to monitor a discharge air sensor
on the VAV box (if available). The flow balancer uses this object to verify that
discharge air temperature is rising when the reheat is overridden on.
345.
To configure MP-V discharge air temp

3. In the List View, select Discharge Air Temp.

367


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.




be sent.

368




analog value.

9. Click OK.

369
14.14 Configuring an MP-V Effective Reheat Command
14.14 Configuring an MP-V Effective Reheat

Command
You configure the optional MP-V effective reheat to monitor the reheat command.
The application engineer should program the object for use with either analog or
digital reheat command objects.
Note
The optional effective reheat command is available so the eCommission SmartX
Controllers tool can observe and display reheat value status. Some program logic
may read from either the analog or digital reheat object, performs its control logic
function, and then drive the effective reheat command. In this way, you can
determine if some other process is controlling reheat rather than the
eCommission SmartX Controllers tool.
345.
To configure an MP-V effective reheat command

3. In the List View, select the Effective Reheat Command.

370


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.




be sent.

371




analog value.

9. Click OK.

372
14.15 Configuring MP-V Fan Operation

You integrate optional MP-V fan operation in a manner that allows the flow balancer
to override the VAV fan.
345.
To configure MP-V fan operation

3. In the List View, select Fan Operation.

373


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.





374
Continued





analog value.



375



value.

11. Click OK.

376
14.16 Configuring MP-V Flow Balance Data

You configure MP-V flow balance data to store flow balance data. The calibration
data is recorded in this object during flow balancing. Normally, you have no direct
interaction with this object. However, it may be possible for someone to develop
their own flow balance routines to work with it.
345.
To configure MP-V flow balance data


377

Flow balance status Displays balancing status as follow:

• Flow balance not started
• Flow balance started
• Flow balance in progress
• Flow balance complete
Rated box flow Enter the box flow using the tag pasted
on the VAV box. Typically, this is where
the information is located. When it is not
specified there, the manufacturer
provides a table listing the rating cross-
referenced to the box size.
Actuator rotation Select the direction of the actuator

rotation to open the damper:
• Clockwise to open (inactive)
• Counterclockwise to open (active)
Box measured maximum flow Enter the maximum flow as measured by

the controller.
Box measured intermediate flow Enter the intermediate flow as measured

by the controller.
Box measured minimum flow Enter the minimum flow as measured by

the controller.
Hood measured maximum flow Enter the maximum flow as measured by

the calibrated flow hood.
Hood measured intermediate flow Enter the intermediate flow as measured

by the calibrated flow hood.
Hood measured minimum flow Enter the minimum flow as measured by

Flow balance datetime Enter the date and time at the completion
of flow balancing operations.
Flow balance comment Use this field to enter a text string for
balancer note keeping purposes.
Flow balance backup datetime Displays the date and time when flow
balance data was stored on the
Flow balance restore datetime Displays when the EcoStruxure BMS

server last restored flow balance data to
an MP-V controller.


378



BACnet type Displays the type.

9. Click OK.

379
14.17 Configuring an MP-V Flow Setpoint

You configure an MP-V flow setpoint to accept the application's flow setpoint. The
engineer develops a portion of the application that determines the desired air flow to
achieve the desired temperature. The user-developed application is integrated with
this pre-built portion of the application with a binding to value.
345.
To configure an MP-V flow setpoint

3. In the List View, select the Flow Setpoint.

380


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.




be sent.


381
Continued





analog value.




value.


382
11. Click OK.

383
14.18 Configuring MP-V Velocity Pressure

You configure MP-V velocity pressure to display the pressure transducer velocity
pressure value. This object feeds the box flow which calculates the volumetric flow.
345.
To configure MP-V velocity pressure

3. In the List View, select Velocity Pressure.

384


release the value.
on WebHelp.

WebHelp.

commandable.



Terminal Enter the terminal reference. This object

only allows the use of the built-in pressure
transducer named, Airflow sensor. Other

385
Continued
inputs are not allowed. If an external
sensor is required, a different analog input
object is necessary.

false readings.

be sent.


Electrical scale top Enter the highest electrical value that can
be used for the damper command.
Electrical scale bottom Enter the lowest electrical value that can
Engineering scale top Enter the highest engineering value that

can be used for the damper command.
Engineering scale bottom Enter the lowest engineering value that

can be used for the damper command.





analog value.


386
9. Click OK.

387
14.19 Configuring an MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object
14.19 Configuring an MP-V Variable Air

Volume Data Object
You configure an MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object to act as a container for
other objects as well as provide the central functions of VAV control. You enter
balancing setpoints and also read K factor values here.
345.
To configure an MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object

2. In the List View, click Variable Air Volume Data.

388

Maximum flow setpoint Enter a high flow balance point that

equals the maximum flow setpoint.
Intermediate flow setpoint Enter an intermediate flow balance point

that may equal the reheat minimum flow
setpoint, or enter the minimum flow
setpoint if using a volatile organic
compounds minimum (VOC minimum)
flow setpoint.
Minimum flow setpoint Enter a low flow balance point that may
equal the minimum flow setpoint, or the
volatile organic compounds (VOC)
minimum flow if used.
Flow control deadband Enter a flow control deadband from .5 to

20%.
Balanced K factor Displays the rated box flow multiplied by a

flow correction factor as calculated by the
MP-V.
Balanced flow correction factor Displays the hood measured maximum

flow divided by the box measured
maximum flow. This factor is calculated
by the MP-V.
Pressure transducer status Displays the enumerated status as

follows:
• Normal
• Sensor Fail (sensor failure): If the
pressure sensor detects a failure
during self-diagnostics, it notifies the
MP-V main board CPU during the
communication process. A failure is
detected when the pressure sensor
reads the raw pressure from the
sensor. It is recommended that you
call Schneider product support
should this diagnostic status display.
• Neg. Press (negative pressure). For
more information, see section 16.3
“MP-V Variable Air Volume Data
Object Neg. Press Diagnostic
Message” on page 447.
• Over Range (over range pressure).
For more information, see section
16.4 “MP-V Variable Air Volume
Data Object Over Range Diagnostic
Damper status Displays the enumeration property

indicating diagnostic conditions in priority
order from highest priority to lowest
priority:

389
Continued
• Normal
• Stuck Damper. For more
information, see section 16.1 “MP-V
Variable Air Volume Data Object
Stuck Damper Diagnostic Message”
on page 445.
• Control Loss. For more information,
see section 16.2 “MP-V Variable Air
Volume Data Object Control Loss
Diagnostic Message” on page 446.
Damper stroke Displays the damper stroke from closed

(usually the closed stop screw) to open
(usually the open stop screw) in degrees
of rotation.
Raw flow Displays the non-calibrated flow as

calculated by the MP-V.
Flow balance command timeout Enter a configurable timer value in

(min) minutes to release priority 7 commands
for certain objects. For more information,
see section 14.7 “Variable Air Volume
Data Objects” on page 345.



BACnet type Displays the type, such as device or VAV

object.

8. Click OK.

390
15 MP-V User Interface
Topics
MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Command Tab
MP-V Box Flow Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Box Flow Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Damper Command Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Damper Command Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Damper Command Properties – Command Tab
MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Command Tab
MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Command Tab
MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Command Tab
MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties – Basic Tab
MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties – Advanced Tab
MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties – Basic
Tab
MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties –
Advanced Tab
15.1 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Basic Tab
15.1 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Basic

Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V analog reheat properties.
Figure: MP-V analog reheat properties - Basic tab

393
Table: MP-V Analog Reheat Properties - Basic Tab

Component Description
Value Displays an orange button if the value is not

configured. When configured, displays the
current value for the point under the
following conditions:
• Unforce: Displays a forced value. Enter
a forced value or click to release the
value.
For all BACnet inputs, a Forced condition is
the same as out of service. For more
information, see the Forced Values topic on
WebHelp.
A Forced status may also include a priority
level setting for BACnet outputs and values
that are commandable. For more
information, see the Forced Priority Level
topic on WebHelp.
supported for BACnet objects that are not
commandable and do not have an out of
service property.

the BACnet Status Flags topic on WebHelp.
Out of service Select True to disassociate the Value from

the physical output. Out of service is
troubleshooting purposes, and for override
when an object is not commandable.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the object. For more

information, see section 5.8 “MP Series
Controller Reliability ” on page 203.
Event state Displays Off Normal when intrinsic alarming

has been configured and the point is in an
alarm state.
Alarm state Displays an alarm state on EcoStruxure BMS

servers that provides additional information
about an intrinsic alarm or algorithmic alarm
configured for an object. For more
information, see the Alarm States topic on
WebHelp.

be sent.


394
Continued
Maximum value Enter the highest value that can be reliably


395
15.2 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Advanced Tab
15.2 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties –

Advanced Tab
Use the Advanced tab to view and edit properties including the BACnet name for
the MP-V analog reheat.
Figure: MP-V analog reheat properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Analog Reheat Properties - Advanced Tab


BACnet name View the name of the BACnet object or type

a new name to change the name.
Profile name Displays the unique name of the profile that

describes the characteristics of the object,
such as additional properties, behaviors, or
requirements.

396
15.3 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Command Tab
15.3 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties –

Command Tab
Use the Command tab to enter a value for the Relinquish default or view the
priority array for the MP-V analog reheat object.
Note
The eCommission SmartX Controllers tool writes directly to priority 7 without any
direct user involvement.
Figure: MP-V analog reheat properties - Command tab
Table: MP-V Analog Reheat Properties - Command Tab

Relinquish default Select the value to be used by the Value

property when all values in the priority array
are set to Null.

value.

397
15.3 MP-V Analog Reheat Properties – Command Tab
Continued

398
15.4 MP-V Box Flow Properties – Basic Tab

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V box flow properties.
Figure: MP-V box flow object properties - Basic tab

399
Table: MP-V Box Flow Object Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.

400
15.5 MP-V Box Flow Properties – Advanced Tab
15.5 MP-V Box Flow Properties – Advanced

Tab
the MP-V box flow.
Figure: MP-V box flow properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Box Flow Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

401
15.6 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Basic Tab
15.6 MP-V Damper Command Properties –

Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP-V damper command.
Figure: MP-V damper command properties - Basic tab

402
Table: MP-V Damper Command Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.
Electrical value Provides the same value as Damper

position.
Damper position Displays the damper position as a

percentage of stroke. Upon power-up and if
the stroke is unknown, the actuator drives
fully closed, and then drives fully open to
determine the stroke.
During normal operation, the stroke is
recalculated automatically if someone moves
the damper end stops. With damper stroke
calculation, be sure to consider the
possibility that someone may manually
reposition the damper.




alarm state.

403
Continued

WebHelp.
Recalibrate Select True to force the recalculation of the

Variable Air Volume data's damper stroke
value. The controller then turns recalibrate to
False when finished.
Typically, you should not need to set this
property since the controller relearns the
stroke through normal operation if it is
changed.
Terminal Select the terminal reference. This object

only allows the use of the built-in damper
actuator named, Damper control1. Other
outputs are not allowed. If an external
actuator is needed a different analog output
object is necessary.

be sent.



404
15.7 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Advanced Tab

Advanced Tab
the MP-V damper command.
Figure: MP-V damper command properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Damper Command Properties - Advanced Tab



BACnet name Displays the type.

requirements.

405
15.8 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Command Tab

Command Tab
priority array for the MP-V damper command object.
Note
Figure: MP-V damper command properties - Command tab
Table: MP-V Damper Command Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

406
15.8 MP-V Damper Command Properties – Command Tab
Continued

407
15.9 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Basic Tab
15.9 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Basic

Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V digital reheat properties.
Figure: MP-V digital reheat properties - Basic tab

408
Table: MP-V Digital Reheat Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.
Inactive text Type the text that explains the Inactive state
of the value, such as Idle. This text is used as
an enumeration text for the Value property
and related priority array values. This text is
visible in graphics, in the Watch pane, and in
the Properties pane. The default is Inactive.

409
Continued
Active text Type the text that explains the Active state of
the value, such as Running. This text is used
as an enumeration text for the Value
This text is visible in graphics, in the Watch
pane, and in the Properties pane. The
default is Active.

410
15.10 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Advanced Tab
15.10 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties –

Advanced Tab
the MP-V digital reheat.
Figure: MP-V digital reheat properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Digital Reheat Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

411
15.11 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Command Tab
15.11 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties –

Command Tab
priority array for the MP-V digital reheat object.
Note
Figure: MP-V digital reheat properties - Command tab
Table: MP-V Digital Reheat Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

412
15.11 MP-V Digital Reheat Properties – Command Tab
Continued

413
15.12 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Basic Tab
15.12 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties –

Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V discharge air temp properties.
Figure: MP-V discharge air temp properties - Basic tab

414
15.12 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Basic Tab
Table: MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.

415
15.13 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties – Advanced Tab
15.13 MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties –

Advanced Tab
the MP-V discharge air temp.
Figure: MP-V discharge air temp properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Discharge Air Temp Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

416
15.14 MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Basic Tab
15.14 MP-V Effective Reheat Command

Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V effective reheat command properties.
Figure: MP-V effective reheat command properties - Basic tab

417
15.14 MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Basic Tab
Table: MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.

418
15.15 MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties – Advanced Tab
15.15 MP-V Effective Reheat Command

Properties – Advanced Tab
the MP-V effective reheat command.
Figure: MP-V effective reheat command properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Effective Reheat Command Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

419
15.16 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Basic Tab
15.16 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Basic

Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V fan operation properties.
Figure: MP-V fan operation properties - Basic tab

420
Table: MP-V Fan Operation Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.

421
Continued
default is Active.

422
15.17 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Advanced Tab
15.17 MP-V Fan Operation Properties –

Advanced Tab
the MP-V fan operation.
Figure: MP-V fan operation properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Fan Operation Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

423
15.18 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Command Tab
15.18 MP-V Fan Operation Properties –

Command Tab
Use the Command tab to enter a value for the Relinquish default or view the or
view the priority array for the MP-V fan operation object.
Note
Figure: MP-V fan operation properties - Command tab
Table: MP-V Fan Operation Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

424
15.18 MP-V Fan Operation Properties – Command Tab
Continued

425
15.19 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Basic Tab
15.19 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties –

Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V flow balance data properties.
Figure: MP-V flow balance data properties - Basic tab
Table: MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties - Basic Tab

Flow balance status Displays balancing status as follow:

• Flow balance not started
• Flow balance started
• Flow balance in progress
• Flow balance complete
Rated box flow Enter the box flow using the tag pasted on
the VAV box. Typically, this is where the
information is located. When it is not
specified there, the manufacturer provides a
table listing the rating cross-referenced to
the box size.

426
15.19 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Basic Tab
Continued
Actuator rotation Select the direction of the actuator rotation

to open the damper:
• Clockwise to open (inactive)
• Counterclockwise to open (active)
Box measured maximum flow Enter the maximum flow as measured by the
controller.
Box measured intermediate flow Enter the intermediate flow as measured by

the controller.
Box measured minimum flow Enter the minimum flow as measured by the
controller.
Hood measured maximum flow Enter the maximum flow as measured by the
calibrated flow hood.
Hood measured intermediate flow Enter the intermediate flow as measured by

Hood measured minimum flow Enter the minimum flow as measured by the
calibrated flow hood.
Flow balance datetime Enter the date and time at the completion of
flow balancing operations.
Flow balance comment Use this field to enter a text string for
balancer note keeping purposes.
Flow balance backup datetime Displays the date and time when flow
balance data was stored on the EcoStruxure
BMS server.
Flow balance restore datetime Displays when the EcoStruxure BMS server
last restored flow balance data to an MP-V
controller.

427
15.20 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties – Advanced Tab
15.20 MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties –

Advanced Tab
the MP-V flow balance data.
Figure: MP-V flow balance data properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Flow Balance Data Properties - Advanced tab




requirements.

428
15.21 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Basic Tab
15.21 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Basic

Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V flow setpoint properties.
Figure: MP-V flow setpoint properties - Basic tab

429
Table: MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.


430
Continued


431
15.22 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Advanced Tab
15.22 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties –

Advanced Tab
the MP-V flow setpoint.
Figure: MP-V flow setpoint properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

432
15.23 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Command Tab
15.23 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties –

Command Tab
priority array for the MP-V flow setpoint object.
Note
Figure: MP-V flow setpoint properties - Command tab
Table: MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

433
15.23 MP-V Flow Setpoint Properties – Command Tab
Continued

434
15.24 MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties – Basic Tab
15.24 MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties –

Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V velocity pressure properties.
Figure: MP-V velocity pressure properties - Basic tab

435
Table: MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.
topic on WebHelp.
service property.




alarm state.

WebHelp.
Terminal Enter the terminal reference. This object only

allows the use of the built-in pressure
transducer named, Airflow sensor. Other
inputs are not allowed. If an external sensor
is required, a different analog input object is
necessary.

436
Continued

false readings.

be sent.


Electrical scale top Enter the highest electrical value that can be
used for the damper command.
Electrical scale bottom Enter the lowest electrical value that can be
used for the damper command.
Engineering scale top Enter the highest engineering value that can
Engineering scale bottom Enter the lowest engineering value that can

subtracted from the engineering value before
it impacts the Value property.

437
15.25 MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties – Advanced Tab
15.25 MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties –

Advanced Tab
the MP-V velocity pressure.
Figure: MP-V velocity pressure properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Velocity Pressure Properties - Advanced Tab




requirements.

438
15.26 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties – Basic Tab
15.26 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object
properties.
Figure: MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object properties - Basic tab
Table: MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties - Basic Tab
Maximum flow setpoint Enter a high flow balance point that equals
the maximum flow setpoint.
Intermediate flow setpoint Enter an intermediate flow balance point that

may equal the reheat minimum flow setpoint,
or enter the minimum flow setpoint if using a
volatile organic compounds minimum (VOC
minimum) flow setpoint.
Minimum flow setpoint Enter a low flow balance point that may
equal the minimum flow setpoint, or the
volatile organic compounds (VOC) minimum
flow if used.

439
Continued
Flow control deadband Enter a flow control deadband from .5 to

20%.
Balanced k-factor Displays the rated box flow multiplied by a

flow correction factor as calculated by the
MP-V.
Balanced flow correction factor Displays the hood measured maximum flow
divided by the box measured maximum flow.
This factor is calculated by the MP-V.
Pressure transducer status Displays the enumerated status as follows:

• Normal
• Sensor Fail (sensor failure): If the
pressure sensor detects a failure during
self-diagnostics, it notifies the MP-V
main board CPU during the
communication process. A failure is
detected when the pressure sensor
reads the raw pressure from the
sensor. It is recommended that you call
Schneider product support should this
diagnostic status display.
• Neg. Press (negative pressure). For
“MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object
Neg. Press Diagnostic Message” on
page 447.
• Over Range (over range pressure). For
“MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object
Over Range Diagnostic Message” on
page 448.
Damper status Displays the enumeration property indicating

diagnostic conditions in priority order from
highest priority to lowest priority:
• Normal
• Stuck Damper. For more information,
see section 16.1 “MP-V Variable Air
Volume Data Object Stuck Damper
Diagnostic Message” on page 445.
• Control Loss. For more information, see
section 16.2 “MP-V Variable Air Volume
Data Object Control Loss Diagnostic
Damper stroke Displays the damper stroke from closed

(usually the closed stop screw) to open
(usually the open stop screw) in degrees of
rotation.
Raw flow Displays the non-calibrated flow as

calculated by the MP-V.

440
Continued
Flow balance command timeout Enter a configurable timer value in minutes to

release priority 7 commands for certain
objects. For more information, see section
14.7 “Variable Air Volume Data Objects” on
page 345.

441
15.27 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object.
Figure: MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Properties - Advanced Tab


BACnet type Displays the type, such as device or VAV

object.

requirements.

442
16 MP-V Troubleshooting
Topics
MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Stuck Damper
Diagnostic Message
MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Control Loss
Diagnostic Message
MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Neg. Press
Diagnostic Message
MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Over Range
Diagnostic Message
16.1 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Stuck Damper Diagnostic Message

Stuck Damper Diagnostic Message
In the MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object, a Stuck Damper diagnostic
message displays message in the Damper status property indicating that the
controller is unable to move the damper.
16.1.1 Solution
Check that the damper can move from open to closed. The actuator may be
installed improperly, or there may be a blockage in the VAV terminal box.

445
16.2 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Control Loss Diagnostic Message

Control Loss Diagnostic Message
In the MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object, a Control Loss diagnostic message
displays in the Damper status property. It indicates that the flow feedback input is
not responding as expected to changes in damper position.
16.2.1 Solution
The solutions are listed in order: the solution most likely to fix the problem is listed
first. Work through each solution until the problem is resolved.
• Determine whether the supply air flow is adequate
• Ensure the action is correct
• Check to see that there are no loose damper shaft set screws

446
16.3 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Neg. Press Diagnostic Message

Neg. Press Diagnostic Message
In the MP-V Variable Air Volume Data object, a Neg. Press (Negative Pressure)
diagnostic message displays in the Pressure transducer status property.
Typically, this message displays because the pitot connections are cross-
connected (for example, high to low and low to high).
16.3.1 Solution
Ensure the pitot connections are correct by reversing their flow.

447
16.4 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Over Range Diagnostic Message

Over Range Diagnostic Message
In the MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object, an Over Range pressure diagnostic
message displays in the Pressure transducer status property. This message
indicates that the air system is essentially pressurized beyond the maximum value
configured in the Velocity Pressure object. Basically, the air handler is providing
more air volume than can be dissipated through the various VAV ducts.
16.4.1 Solution
• Check for a faulty air pressure sensor that produces a mechanical control
failure
• Determine if a software failure in air handler control has occurred
• Ensure that air handler balancing is correct
• Check to see that the mechanical equipment is installed correctly

448
17 MP Series Controller User
Interface
Topics
MP Series Controller System Tree Icons
MP Series Controller Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Properties – Advanced Tab
Generate Image Dialog Box
MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module Terminal Point
MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Advanced Tab
Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box
MP Series Controller Object Creation Wizard – Advanced
Settings Page
Select Firmware Dialog Box
MP Series Controller Error Log Properties– Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Error Log Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties– Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Current Input Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Current Input Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Resistive Input Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Resistive Input Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties –
Basic Tab
MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Command Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Command Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties -
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties –
Command Tab
MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties –
Basic Tab
Advanced Tab
Command Tab
MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Command Tab
MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties –
Command Tab
MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Command Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Command Tab
MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Command Tab
MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Command
Tab
MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties –
Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties –
Command Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties –
Command Tab
MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties –
Basic Tab
Advanced Tab
Command Tab
MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Alarm
Settings Tab
MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties –
Basic Tab
Advanced Tab
Alarm Settings Tab
MP Series Controller Schedule Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Schedule Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Calendar Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Calendar Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Inputs Tab
MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Outputs Tab
MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Functions Tab
MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Basic Tab
MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Functions Tab
MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Basic
Tab
MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties –
Advanced Tab
MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Inputs
Tab
MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties –
Outputs Tab
SmartX Sensor Properties – Basic Tab
SmartX Sensor Properties – Advanced Tab
SmartX Sensor Object Properties – Basic Tab
SmartX Sensor Object Properties – Advanced Tab
SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Basic Tab
SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Advanced Tab
SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Basic Tab
SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Advanced Tab
17 MP Series Controller User Interface
17.1 MP Series Controller System Tree Icons
17.1 MP Series Controller System Tree Icons

The following table describes the MP Series controller icons in the System Tree
pane.
Table: MP Series Controller System Tree Icons

Icon Description
MP-C
Indicates an MP-C. For more information,
see section 1.1 “MP Series Controller
Overview” on page 23.
MP-V
Indicates an MP-V. For more information,
see section 1.1 “MP Series Controller
Overview” on page 23.
BACnet Interface
Indicates a BACnet interface for a SmartX
server. For more information, see section
1.13 “EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an
MP Series Controller” on page 46.
IP Network
Indicates an IP network. For more
Controller BACnet/IP Support” on page 28.
IO Resources
Displays IO resources including onboard IO
terminals and the sensor bus. For more
Controller Onboard I/O Module” on page 74.
Diagnostics Files
Displays diagnostic information including the
Device Report and Error Log. For more
Controller Diagnostics” on page 94.
SmartX Sensor
Indicates a SmartX Sensor. For more
information, see section 8.1 “SmartX
Sensors” on page 243.

455
17.2 MP Series Controller Properties – Basic Tab
17.2 MP Series Controller Properties – Basic

Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Properties - Basic Tab

System status Displays operational when the BACnet

device is operating correctly.
Database revision Displays the current revision of the database

in the local BACnet device on the
Status Displays Online when the BACnet device is

available on the BACnet network.
Device changed Displays True when objects are created,

renamed, or deleted in the device.
Local time Displays the date and time of the device.

456
17.2 MP Series Controller Properties – Basic Tab
Continued
Host server status Displays the status of the EcoStruxure BMS

server hosting the MP Series controller,
including Online, Offline, or Invalid.
Host server identifier Displays the identifier of the EcoStruxure

BMS server hosting the MP Series controller,
including Unspecified.
Host server name Displays the name of the EcoStruxure BMS

server hosting the MP Series controller.

457
17.3 MP Series Controller Properties – Advanced Tab
17.3 MP Series Controller Properties –

Advanced Tab
Use the Advanced tab to review MP Series controller communication and protocol
status.
Figure: MP Series controller properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Properties - Advanced Tab


BACnet name Type a new name to change the BACnet

name.
BACnet type Displays the type, such as device or analog

value.
Model name Displays the model name of the BACnet

device.
Vendor name Displays the manufacturer of the BACnet

device.

458
Continued
Vendor identifier Displays the number that identifies the

vendor of the BACnet device.
MAC address Displays the MAC address of the device in

hexadecimal.

application software that is installed on the
device.
Location Displays only if the device supports the

property. Type a description of the location
of the device, for example, Building A.
Profile name Displays the BACnet profile name of the

device.
APDU segment timeout (ms) Enter the amount of time between

retransmissions of an unanswered message
segment.
APDU timeout (ms) Enter the amount of time between

retransmissions of an unanswered message.
Number of APDU retries Enter the maximum number of times that an

unanswered message can be retransmitted.
Serial number Displays the serial number of the device.
Maximum segments accepted Displays the maximum number of message

segments that can be received by the
device.
Maximum APDU length accepted Displays the maximum size of a message

that the device can accept.
Segmentation supported Displays whether the BACnet device

supports segmentation of messages and if
so, whether it supports segmented
transmissions, receptions, or both.
Protocol version Displays the BACnet protocol version that

the device supports.
Protocol revision Displays the minor revision number of the

BACnet protocol that the device supports.
Services supported Displays the BACnet services that the device

supports.
Object types supported Displays the BACnet object types that the
device supports.
Last backup time Displays the time of the last BACnet backup
of the device.

459
Continued
Backup path Displays the path to the backup file that is

stored in the file system of the local
Maximum asynchronous polling quota Enter the maximum number of requests the
EcoStruxure BMS server sends to a device
at a time:
• Select Automatically calculate
based on the maximum APDU
length accepted by the device to
configure the quota automatically
based on the maximum APDU length
accepted by the device. If the
maximum APDU length is less than or
equal to 500, the system sets the quota
to 1. If the maximum APDU length is
greater than 500, the system sets the
quota to 4.
• Select 1 - 4 to configure the quota
manually to the selected number.
Important: Contact Product Support
Services for assistance with these options.
Otherwise, it is not recommended that you
change this property.
Firmware TBD
Firmware revision Displays the revision of the firmware

currently running in the device.
Inactive firmware revision Displays the inactive firmware revision.
Upgrade status Reports the status of the device during the

upgrade process.
Upgrade progress This property is not implemented in the MP

Series controller.
Firmware activation time Stores the activation time retained in

persistent memory.
Script engine revision Displays the revision of the Script program

engine running in the device.
Function block engine revision Displays the revision of the Function Block
engine running in the device.
Application revision This property is not currently supported.

460
17.4 Generate Image Dialog Box
17.4 Generate Image Dialog Box

Use the Generate Image dialog box to select the type of file generated when you
perform a field deploy.
Figure: Generate Image dialog box
Table: Generate Image Dialog box

Components Description
Generate an image file specific to this Click to produce a file that contains device-
device specific information that you can only
download to the device that it was created
for.
Generate an application image file Click to produce a file that does not contain
that can be deployed into any device device-specific information. You can deploy
of the same model this file to any device of the same model that
it was created for.
This option is only available when the MP
Series controller is located in the custom
type library. For more information, see the
Custom Type Library Pane topic on
WebHelp.

461
17.5 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Module Terminal Point Properties – Basic Tab
17.5 MP Series Controller Onboard I/O

Module Terminal Point Properties –
Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view the properties of the MP Series controller onboard I/O
terminal points.
Figure: MP Series controller onboard I/O terminal point properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Onboard I/O Terminal Point Properties - Basic Tab
Channel Displays the channel where the onboard I/O

terminal point is configured. For more
Controller Onboard I/O Module” on page 74.

462
17.6 MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties – Basic Tab
17.6 MP Series Controller IP Network

Settings Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the IP network configuration properties for an
MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller IP network settings - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller IP Network Settings - Basic Tab

Reliability Specifies whether the IP and connected

networks are reliable as far as the BACnet
device can determine and, if not, why not.
Changes pending Specifies whether the configuration settings

in the IP network map to the current
configuration settings. A value of False
indicates that the configuration settings
reflect the current port configuration
information. This is a read-only property.

463
17.6 MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties – Basic Tab
Continued
Command status Requests that the IP network perform

various actions including:
• Idle
• Discard changes
• Renew foreign device registration
• Renew DHCP port lease
Assigned IP address Displays the IP address that the MP Series

controller is currently using.
Assigned subnet mask Displays the subnet mask the MP Series

Assigned default gateway Displays the default gateway the MP Series

IP assignment Select either Static or Dyamic to specify

the method you wish to use to assign the IP
address to the MP Series controller. For
more information, see section 1.14 “ IP
Address Assignment for MP Series
IP address Type the address of this IP network.
Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask for this network.
Default gateway Type the IP address of the default gateway

for this network (optional).
IP port number Enter an IP port number, or accept the

default setting of 47,808 which is the default
for all MP Series controllers.
IP mode Displays the BACnet IP mode of this IP

network including:
• Normal: The device is not operating as
a foreign device over this IP network.
• Foreign: The device is operating as a
foreign device over this IP network.
BBMD address Type the BBMD address the device should

use to register as a foreign device when IP
mode is specified as Foreign.
Subscription lifetime Enter the number of seconds the device

waits before renewing the subscription with
the BBMD.

464
17.7 MP Series Controller IP Network Settings Properties – Advanced Tab
17.7 MP Series Controller IP Network

Settings Properties – Advanced Tab
the MP Series controller IP network settings.
Figure: MP Series controller IP network settings - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller IP Network Settings - Advanced tab




value.

requirements.

465
17.8 MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Basic Tab
17.8 MP Series Controller Settings

Use the Basic tab to view and edit access to the hardware components and
Cybersecurity settings for the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller settings - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Settings - Basic Tab

Reliability Displays the reliability of the white list

configuration in the MP Series controller. For
“Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box” on page
469.
Display Specifies whether or not the MP-C add-on

display is Connected or
Connected/Restricted which indicates
that although it is connected, some of the
display functions are disabled. For example,
the Hand override control is disabled and/or
network information is restricted from
displaying.

466
17.8 MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Basic Tab
Continued
Sensor bus Displays whether the sensor bus is Online.
RSTP Enable or disable RSTP as needed

depending on your network topology. The
default setting is Disabled. Any changes
you make to this property are executed
following a subsequent warm or cold start. A
factory or network reset returns the RSTP
setting to Disabled.
Display network information Click Enabled to display MP-C network

information including the IP and MAC
address in the MP-C add-on display. For
Cybersecurity purposes, you may want to
click Disabled so only the model number
appears in the display.
Hand override control Click Enabled to enable hand override

control in the MP Series controller.
Sensor bus Click Enabled to enable the sensor bus in

the MP Series controller.
Ethernet port 2 Click Enabled to enable Ethernet port 2 in

the MP Series controller.
White list Click Enabled to enabled white list

capabilities in the MP Series controller. The
whitelist is a list of devices approved for
authorized access by the MP Series
controller.
Allowed IP addresses
Click to add a new IP address to the
white list of approved IP addresses. For
more information, see section 2.10 “Adding
an IP Address to the White List in an MP
Click to edit an IP address in the white

list of approved IP addresses.
Click to remove an IP address from the

white list of approved IP addresses.

467
17.9 MP Series Controller Settings Properties – Advanced Tab
17.9 MP Series Controller Settings

the MP Series controller settings object.
Figure: MP Series controller settings - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Settings - Advanced tab




value.

requirements.

468
17.10 Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box
17.10 Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box

Use the Properties - IPAddress dialog box to edit or change the IP addresses in
the whitelist. The whitelist is a list of devices approved for authorized access by the
MP Series controller. For Cybersecurity purposes, only the IP addresses you enter
in this list are granted TCP/IP communication access.
Figure: Properties - IPAddress dialog box
Table: Properties - IPAddress Dialog Box

IP Address Displays the IP address to which you want

the MP Series controller to grant TCP/IP
communication access.

469
17.11 MP Series Controller Object Creation Wizard – Advanced Settings Page
17.11 MP Series Controller Object Creation

Wizard – Advanced Settings Page
Use the Advanced settings page to configure the terminal on the point object
and assign the physical point to the logical point object.
Figure: Advanced settings page
Table: Advanced Settings Page

Terminal Enter the Onboard I/O terminal. For more

Terminals on the Onboard I/O Module” on
page 75.
BACnet Trend log Click the ellipsis button and when the wizard
displays, create a BACnet trend log. For
more information, see the Creating a BACnet
Trend Log topic on WebHelp.

470
17.12 Select Firmware Dialog Box

Use the Select firmware dialog box to download MP Series controller firmware to
the EcoStruxure Building Operation database. For more information, see section
3.11 “MP Series Controller Firmware Management” on page 105.
Figure: Select firmware dialog box
Table: Select Firmware Dialog Box

Name Displays the name of the MP Series

controller firmware file.
Firmware version Displays the MP Series controller firmware

version.
Script version Displays the version of the Script engine

supported by a particular firmware release.
Function block version Displays the version of the Function Block

engine supported by a particular firmware
release.
Browse Click to select an MP Series controller

firmware file to upload.
Download firmware Select to download firmware to the MP

Series controller.
Manually Select to manually activate the MP Series

controller firmware.

471
Continued
Immediately Select to immediately activate the MP Series

controller firmware.
Time Select and enter the date and time the MP

Series controller firmware is to be activated.

472
17.13 MP Series Controller Error Log Properties– Basic Tab
17.13 MP Series Controller Error Log

Properties– Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and configure information in your MP Series controller
error log.
Figure: MP Series controller error log - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Error Log - Basic Tab

Record count Displays the size of the data files in records.

Record count displays the number of
records only when the File access
method is RECORD_ACCESS.
File size Displays the size of the data files in octets.
File access method Supports the STREAM_ACCESS file access

method.
Modification date Displays the last time the BACnet File was
created or written to.
File type Displays the purpose of the data files that

are described by the BACnet File.

473
17.13 MP Series Controller Error Log Properties– Basic Tab
Continued
Archive Displays whether the BACnet File has been

saved for historical and archival purposes, or
backup purposes. One of the following
values displays:
• True indicates that the BACnet File has
been saved for archival purposes and
that the data files have not been
changed by internal processes or
through File Access Services since the
last time the BACnet File was archived.
• False indicates that the BACnet File
has been saved for backup purposes
and that the data files have been
Read-only Displays one of the following values to

indicate whether the data files can be
changed by the BACnet AtomicWriteFile
service:
• True indicates that the data files may
not be changed by the BACnet
AtomicWriteFile service.
• False indicates that the data files may
be changed by the BACnet
File Select the text file.

474
17.14 MP Series Controller Error Log Properties – Advanced Tab
17.14 MP Series Controller Error Log

Use the Advanced tab to view and change BACnet information about the error log
in your MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller error log - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Error Log - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

475
17.15 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties– Basic Tab
17.15 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File

Properties– Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and configure information in your MP Series controller
diagnostics files, including the device, crash, and IO checkout reports as well as the
commissioning and flow balance (MP-V only) logs.
Figure: MP Series controller device report - Basic tab

476
Figure: MP-V flow balance log - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties - Basic Tab

File size Displays the size of the data files in octets.
File access method Supports the STREAM_ACCESS file access

method.
Modification date Displays the last time the BACnet File was
created or written to.
File type Displays the purpose of the data files that

are described by the BACnet File.

477
Continued
Archive Displays whether the BACnet File has been

saved for historical and archival purposes, or
backup purposes. One of the following
values displays:
• True indicates that the BACnet File has
been saved for archival purposes and
that the data files have not been
• False indicates that the BACnet File
has been saved for backup purposes
and that the data files have been
Read-only Displays one of the following values to

indicate whether the data files can be
changed by the BACnet AtomicWriteFile
service:
• True indicates that the data files may
not be changed by the BACnet
• False indicates that the data files may
be changed by the BACnet

478
17.16 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties – Advanced Tab
17.16 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File

Use the Advanced tab to view and change BACnet information in the device,
crash, and IO checkout reports as well as the commissioning log.
Figure: MP Series controller device report - Advanced tab

479
17.16 MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties – Advanced Tab
Figure: MP Series controller IO checkout report - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Diagnostic File Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

480
17.17 MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.17 MP Series Controller Counter Input

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller
counter input point.
Figure: MP Series controller counter input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties - Basic Tab


• Unforce- Displays a forced value. Enter
value.
• Force- Displays a non-forced value.
Click to force the value. The maximum
value of a counter input is 4294967295.
Once passed, that value wraps to 0.
The maximum supported rate for a
counter input is 25Hz.

BACnet point. For more information, see the
BACnet Status Flags topic on WebHelp.

481
17.17 MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Basic Tab
Continued

Reset counter Select True to set the counter value to 0.

The reset counter turns back to False after
being set to True.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the point. For more


alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.

be sent.

482
17.18 MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.18 MP Series Controller Counter Input

the MP Series controller counter input point.
Figure: MP Series controller counter input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Counter Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

483
17.19 MP Series Controller Current Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.19 MP Series Controller Current Input

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller current
input point.
Figure: MP Series controller current input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Current Input Properties - Basic Tab


• Unforce. Displays a forced value. Enter
value.
Click to force the value. For example,
the present value is measured from 0 to
20mA.


484
Continued



alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.

false readings.

be sent.



current (mA), or resistance (kohm) value for
the input point scale. (Example: 10 VDC, 20
mA, or 60 kohm).
Electrical scale bottom Type a bottom of the range voltage, (VDC),

mA, or 0 kohm)
Engineering scale top Type a top of the range engineering value for
the input point scale. (Example: 100%)

0%).

485
Continued


486
17.20 MP Series Controller Current Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.20 MP Series Controller Current Input

the MP Series controller current input point.
Figure: MP Series controller current input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Current Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

487
17.21 MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.21 MP Series Controller Digital Input

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller digital
input point.
Figure: MP Series controller digital input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties - Basic Tab

Value Displays an orange button if the Associated

value is not configured. When configured,
displays the current value for the point under
the following conditions:
value.
WebHelp.

488
17.21 MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Basic Tab
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.

the point and the Value property. When Out
of service is set to False, the Polarity
property causes a change to the Value
property.
default is Active.

489
17.22 MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.22 MP Series Controller Digital Input

the MP Series controller digital input point.
Figure: MP Series controller digital input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

490
17.23 MP Series Controller Resistive Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.23 MP Series Controller Resistive Input

resistive input point.
Figure: MP Series controller resistive input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Resisitve Input Properties - Basic Tab


a forced value or click to realease the
value.
Click to force the value. For example, it
displays the resistance measured
between 0 and 65535 ohms. The
module resistive input range is from 0
to 15000 ohms.


491
Continued



alarm state.

WebHelp.

page 75.

false readings.

be sent.



mA, or 60 kohm).

mA, or 0 kohm)

0%).

492
Continued


493
17.24 MP Series Controller Resistive Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.24 MP Series Controller Resistive Input

the MP Series controller resistive input point.
Figure: MP Series controller resistive input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Resisitive Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

494
17.25 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.25 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature

Input Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller RTD
temperature input point.
Figure: MP Series controller RTD temperature input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties - Basic Tab


value.
the present value displays the
converted temperature value in degrees
including the user-specified wiring
resistance and offset ranging from -50
to 150°C.

495
17.25 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties – Basic Tab
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.
Sensor type Select the specified sensor type to

determine how the resistance value is
converted to temperature.

false readings.

be sent.




496
17.26 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.26 MP Series Controller RTD Temperature

Input Properties – Advanced Tab
the MP Series controller RTD temperature input point.
Figure: MP Series controller RTD temperature input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller RTD Temperature Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

497
17.27 MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.27 MP Series Controller Supervised Input

supervised input point.
Figure: MP Series controller supervised input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.

498
17.27 MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Basic Tab
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.
Supervised circuit Select one of the following: Not set, None,

NO Series, NC Series, NO Parallel, NC
Parallel. NO Series/Parallel, or NC
Series/Parallel (NO= normally open,
NC= normally closed).
Supervised resistor value Type the value or use the up and down
arrow keys to enter the resistance value of
the resistors in the supervised circuit.

499
17.28 MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.28 MP Series Controller Supervised Input

the MP Series controller supervised input point.
Figure: MP Series controller supervised input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

500
17.28 MP Series Controller Supervised Input Properties – Advanced Tab
Table: Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

501
17.29 MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.29 MP Series Controller Temperature Input

temperature input point.
Figure: MP Series controller temperature input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties - Basic Tab


value.
the present value displays the
converted temperature value in degrees
including the user-specified wiring
resistance and offset ranging from -50
to 150°C.

502
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.
Thermistor type Select the appropriate thermistor type from

the list.
With the SmartX Living Space Temperature
Sensor, be sure to select the thermistor type
Thermistor 10k Type 1 (Continuum),
even if this sensor is a 10k Type 3
thermistor. The SmartX Living Space
Resistive Temperature Sensor is the
exception here. While SmartX Sensors are
usually connected to the sensor bus, the
SmartX Living Space Resistive Temperature
Sensor is connected to the MP Series
controller temperature input.

false readings.

be sent.


503
Continued



504
17.30 MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.30 MP Series Controller Temperature Input

the MP Series controller temperature input point.
Figure: MP Series controller temperature input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Temperature Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

505
17.31 MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties – Basic Tab
17.31 MP Series Controller Voltage Input

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller voltage
input point.
Figure: MP Series controller voltage input properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties - Basic Tab


value.
WebHelp.

506
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

point.

page 75.

false readings.

be sent.



mA, or 60 kohm).

mA, or 0 kohm)

507
Continued

0%).


508
17.32 MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties – Advanced Tab
17.32 MP Series Controller Voltage Input

the MP Series controller voltage input point.
Figure: MP Series controller voltage input properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Voltage Input Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

509
17.33 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.33 MP Series Controller Current Output

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller current
output point.
Figure: MP Series controller current output properties - Basic tab

510
Table: MP Series Controller Current Output Properties - Basic Tab

Value Displays an orange button if the bound value

is not configured. When configured, displays
a current value for the point under the
• Unforce – Displays a forced value.
Enter a forced value or click to release
the value.
• Force – Displays a non-forced value.
For BACnet outputs and values, which are
commandable, a Forced status may also
include a priority level setting. For more
topic on WebHelp.

output point (that is, the driven current
output value (0-20mA)).




alarm state.

WebHelp.

page 75.

be sent.


511
Continued

Electrical scale top Enter the highest electrical value for the
point.
Electrical scale bottom Enter the lowest electrical value for the point.
Engineering scale top Enter the highest engineering value for the
point.
Engineering scale bottom Enter the lowest engineering value for the
point.

512
17.34 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller current output point.
Figure: MP Series controller current output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Current Output Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

513
17.35 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Command Tab

Properties – Command Tab
Use the Command tab to enter a value for the Relinquish default, or a priority
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller current output. For
more information, see the BACnet Command Priorities topic on WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller current output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Current Output Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

514
17.35 MP Series Controller Current Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued
Priority 6 Priority 6 is reserved for the Minimum_on

and Minimum_off properties of the object.
Digital Value and Digital Output objects in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation database do
not support these optional properties.
Priority 6 is read-only.

515
17.36 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.36 MP Series Controller Digital Output

output point.
Figure: MP Series controller digital output - Basic tab

516
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

output point (that is, Engergized and De-
energized for single digital outputs (relay
and triac) including digital, digital pulsed, and
pulsed width modulated outputs).




alarm state.

WebHelp.

page 75.

517
Continued

property.
default is Active.

518
17.37 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller digital output point.
Figure: MP Series controller digital output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

519
17.38 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Command Tab

level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller digital output. For
Figure: MP Series controller digital output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

520
17.38 MP Series Controller Digital Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued


521
17.39 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.39 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed

Output Properties – Basic Tab
pulsed output point.
Figure: MP Series controller digital pulsed output properties - Basic tab

522
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.





alarm state.

WebHelp.

page 75.

523
Continued

property.

be sent.

524
17.40 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties - Advanced Tab

Output Properties - Advanced Tab
the MP Series controller digital pulsed output point.
Figure: MP Series controller digital pulsed output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

525
17.41 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties – Command Tab

Output Properties – Command Tab
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller digital pulsed output.
For more information, see the BACnet Command Priorities topic on WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller digital pulsed output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

526
17.41 MP Series Controller Digital Pulsed Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued


527
17.42 MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.42 MP Series Controller Pulse Width

Modulated Output Properties – Basic
Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller pulse
width modulated output point.
Figure: MP Series controller pulse width modulated output properties - Basic tab

528
Table: MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties - Basic tab
Value (s) Displays an orange button if the Associated

value.
WebHelp.





alarm state.

WebHelp.

property.

529
Continued

Select. For more information, see section
2.12 “Configuring Terminals on the Onboard
I/O Module” on page 75.

be sent.
PWM scale Select the PWM scale parameter Duration (s)

or Duty cycle (%). For more information, see
the I/O Point Scaling topic on WebHelp.
Period (s) Enter a period value. For example, a duty

cycle of 25% and a Period of 20 seconds
produces a 5 second pulse every 20
seconds (25% of 20 seconds = 5 seconds).
PWM minimum pulse (s) Enter a PWM minimum pulse. If the value is
on for less than the minimum pulse, the
value remains off.

530
17.43 MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties – Advanced Tab

Modulated Output Properties –
Advanced Tab
the MP Series controller pulse width modulated output point.
Figure: MP Series controller pulse width modulated output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties - Advanced

Tab



value.

531
17.43 MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties – Advanced Tab
Continued

requirements.

532
17.44 MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties – Command Tab

Modulated Output Properties –
Command Tab
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller pulsed width
modulated output. For more information, see the BACnet Command Priorities topic
on WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller pulse width modulated output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties - Command

Tab
Relinquish default (s) Select the value to be used by the Value

are set to Null.

value.

533
17.44 MP Series Controller Pulse Width Modulated Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued
Priority 6 (s) Priority 6 is reserved for the Minimum_on

Priority x (s) Enter a priority value or Null.

534
17.45 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.45 MP Series Controller Tristate Output

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller tristate
output point.
Figure: MP Series controller tristate output properties - Basic tab

535
Table: MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

energized
relay/triac is energized and the second
(tristate partner) relay/triac is de-
energized




alarm state.

WebHelp.

536
Continued

property.

page 75.

537
17.46 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller tristate output point.
Figure: MP Seriescontroller tristate output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties - Advanced Tab

Object ID Displays the unique name of the profile that

requirements.


value.

requirements.

538
17.47 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Command Tab

level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller tristate output. For
Figure: MP Series controller tristate output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

539
17.47 MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued


540
17.48 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.48 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed

Output Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller tristate
pulsed output point.
Figure: MP Series controller tristate pulsed output properties - Basic tab

541
Table: MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

energized
relay/triac is energized and the second
(tristate partner) relay/triac is de-
energized




alarm state.

WebHelp.

542
Continued

property.

page 75.

be sent.

543
17.49 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Advanced Tab

Output Properties – Advanced Tab
the MP Series controller tristate pulsed output point.
Figure: MP Series controller tristate pulsed output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

544
17.50 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Command Tab

Output Properties – Command Tab
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller tristate output. For
Figure: MP Series controller tristate output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Tristate Output Properties - Command Tab


value.

are set to Null.

545
17.50 MP Series Controller Tristate Pulsed Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued


546
17.51 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Basic Tab
17.51 MP Series Controller Voltage Output

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller voltage
output point.
Figure: MP Series controller voltage output properties - basic tab

547
Table: MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

output point (that is, the driven voltage
output value (0-10V)).




alarm state.

WebHelp.

page 75.

be sent.


548
Continued


mA, or 60 kohm).

mA, or 0 kohm)

0%).

549
17.52 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller voltage output point.
Figure: MP Series controller voltage output properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

550
17.53 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Command Tab

level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller voltage output point.
For more information, see the BACnet Command Priorities topic on WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller voltage output properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

551
17.53 MP Series Controller Voltage Output Properties – Command Tab
Continued


552
17.54 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.54 MP Series Controller Analog Value

Use the Basic tab to configure an analog value. Analog values store numeric
information for the MP Series controller. MP Series controller value objects are
storage locations in the controller's memory.
Figure: MP Series controller analog value properties - Basic tab

553
17.54 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Basic Tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties - Basic Tab

Value Enter the bound value to be used as a

control system parameter under the
the value.
topic on WebHelp.

BACnet value. For more information, see the

Reliability Displays the reliability of the value. For more


alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.



554
17.55 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller analog value.
Figure: MP Series controller analog value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

555
17.56 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Command Tab

Use the Command tab to enter a value for the Relinquish default and to view or
configure the priority array for the analog value. For more information, see the
BACnet Command Priorities topic on WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller analog value properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

556
17.56 MP Series Controller Analog Value Properties – Command Tab
Continued


557
17.57 MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.57 MP Series Controller DateTime Value

Use the Basic tab to configure MP Series controller DateTime values. DateTime
values store date and time information used in schedules and timestamps.
Figure: MP Series controller datetime value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

558
17.57 MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued



559
17.58 MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties – Advanced Tab
17.58 MP Series Controller DateTime Value

the MP Series controller and other datetime value properties.
Figure: MP Series controller datetime value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller DateTime Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

560
17.59 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.59 MP Series Controller Digital Value

Use the Basic tab to configure an MP Series controller device digital value. Digital
values are used as control system parameters that have only one of two possible
states:
• Active (enabled)
• Inactive (disabled)
Figure: MP Series controller digital value properties - Basic tab

561
17.59 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Basic Tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.




alarm state.

WebHelp.
default is Active.

562
17.60 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller digital value properties.
Figure: MP Series controller digital value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

563
17.61 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Command Tab

configure the priority array for the digital value. For more information, see the
Figure: MP Series controller digital value properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

564
17.61 MP Series Controller Digital Value Properties – Command Tab
Continued


565
17.62 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.62 MP Series Controller Multistate Value

Use the Basic tab to configure MP Series controller multistate value properties.
Multistate values are used as control system parameters. However, their values can
be any one of a set that you define.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate value properties- Basic tab

566
17.62 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Basic Tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.




alarm state.

WebHelp.

567
17.63 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller multistate value properties.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

568
17.64 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Command Tab

configure the priority array for the multistate value. For more information, see the
Figure: MP Series controller multistate value properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

569
17.64 MP Series Controller Multistate Value Properties – Command Tab
Continued


570
17.65 MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.65 MP Series Controller String Value

Use the Basic tab to configure MP Series controller string values. String values
contain plain text that can include messages that are displayed to an operator.
Figure: MP Series controller string value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller String Value Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

571
17.65 MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued



572
17.66 MP Series Controller String Value Properties – Advanced Tab
17.66 MP Series Controller String Value

the MP Series controller string value properties.
Figure: MP Series controller string value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller String Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

573
17.67 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.67 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer

Value Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to bind or reference to an object and configure the analog
consumer value.
Figure: MP Series controller analog consumer value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties- Basic tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

574
17.67 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued


Reliability Displays the reliability of the value by

reporting configuration errors or indicating if
the MP Series controller is unable to
subscribe to its object property reference.

alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.
Input binding reference Transfer a value by binding or referencing an

object with a corresponding data type. For
more information, see the BACnet
References and System References topic on
WebHelp.

WebHelp.
Subscription type Specifies the method of subscription that the

MP Series controller employs.
Poll interval Select how often you want polling to occur

for the selected device/server during
communication attempts.
COV resubscription interval (s) Enter the number of seconds to set the
frequency of the subscription renewals.

575
17.68 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties – Advanced Tab
17.68 MP Series Controller Analog Consumer

Value Properties – Advanced Tab
the MP Series controller analog consumer value.
Figure: MP Series controller analog consumer value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Consumer Value Properties - Advanced Tab

Component Property



value.

requirements.

576
17.69 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.69 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer

Use the Basic tab to bind or reference to an object and configure the digital
consumer value.
Figure: MP Series controller digital consumer value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties - Basic tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

577
17.69 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued



the MP Series controller device is unable to

alarm state.

WebHelp.
default is Active.

WebHelp.

MP Series controller device employs.


578
17.70 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties – Advanced Tab
17.70 MP Series Controller Digital Consumer

the MP Series controller digital consumer value.
Figure: MP Series controller digital consumer value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Consumer Value Properties - Advanced Tab

Component Property



value.

requirements.

579
17.71 MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.71 MP Series Controller Multistate

Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to bind or reference to an object and configure the multistate
consumer value.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate consumer value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties - Basic tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

580
17.71 MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

WebHelp.

MP Series controller employs.


581
17.72 MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties – Advanced Tab

Consumer Value Properties – Advanced
Tab
the MP Series controller multistate consumer value properties.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate consumer value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Consumer Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

582
17.73 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.73 MP Series Controller Analog Producer

Use the Basic tab to configure the analog producer as a change of value (CoV)
with a Guarantee write interval.
Figure: MP Series controller analog producer value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties - Basic tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

583
17.73 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.

be sent.
Output binding list reference

Click to add a new output binding list
reference or a corresponding data type.
Click to edit an output binding list

reference or corresponding data type.
Click to delete an output binding list

Priority for writing Enter a priority for writing the referenced

properties. 1 is the highest priority and 16 is
the lowest.
Guaranteed write interval Specifies the periodic interval in seconds for

which the referenced properties are written
regardless of whether the present value has
changed by COV increment.

584
17.74 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller analog producer value.
Figure: MP Series controller analog producer value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

585
17.75 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Command Tab

Value Properties – Command Tab
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller analog producer
value. For more information, see the BACnet Command Priorities topic on
WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller analog producer value properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

586
17.75 MP Series Controller Analog Producer Value Properties – Command Tab
Continued


587
17.76 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Basic Tab
17.76 MP Series Controller Digital Producer

Use the Basic tab to configure the digital producer as a change of value (CoV) with
a Guarantee write interval.
Figure: MP Series controller digital producer value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

588
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.
default is Active.




the lowest.

589
Continued
Guaranteed write interval Specifies the periodic interval in seconds for

which the referenced properties are written
regardless of whether the present value has
changed by COV increment.

590
17.77 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller digital producer value.
Figure: MP Series controller digital producer value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

591
17.78 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Command Tab

Value Properties – Command Tab
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller digital producer
WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller digital producer value properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

592
17.78 MP Series Controller Digital Producer Value Properties – Command Tab
Continued


593
17.79 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties – Basic Tab

Producer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to configure the multistate producer as a change of value (CoV)
with a Guarantee write interval.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate producer value properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties - Basic Tab


the value.
topic on WebHelp.

594
17.79 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties – Basic Tab
Continued




alarm state.

WebHelp.




the lowest.
Guaranteed write interval Specifies the periodic interval in days, hours,

minutes, and seconds for which the
referenced properties are written regardless
of whether the present value has changed
by COV increment.

595
17.80 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties – Advanced Tab

Producer Value Properties – Advanced
Tab
the MP Series controller multistate producer value.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate producer value properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

596
17.81 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties – Command Tab

Producer Value Properties – Command
Tab
level, and to view the priority array for the MP Series controller multistate producer
WebHelp.
Figure: MP Series controller multistate producer value properties - Command tab
Table: MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties - Command Tab


are set to Null.

value.

597
17.81 MP Series Controller Multistate Producer Value Properties – Command Tab
Continued


598
17.82 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Basic Tab
17.82 MP Series Controller Notification Class

Use the Basic tab to view the number assigned to an MP Series controller
notification class.
Figure: MP Series controller notification class properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties - Basic Tab

BACnet notification Displays the number of the BACnet

notification, which is the same as the
instance number of the object.

599
17.83 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Advanced Tab

the MP Series controller notification class.
Figure: MP Series controller notification class properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

600
17.84 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Alarm Settings Tab

Properties – Alarm Settings Tab
Use the Alarm Settings tab to view and configure the alarm properties of an MP
Series controller notification class.
Figure: MP Series controller notification class properties - Alarm settings tab
Table: MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties - Alarm Settings Tab

Category Enter the alarm category (if any) of the

alarms that you want to reference the
Category 2 notification class.
Cause note group Enter the cause note group that is used by
the alarm.
Action note group Enter the action note group that is used by
the alarm.
Checklist required Select to require that a checklist is filled in

before acknowledging an alarm.

601
17.84 MP Series Controller Notification Class Properties – Alarm Settings Tab
Continued
Prefix for alarm source name Type a prefix that is added to the beginning
of the source name property of an alarm
record.
The system adds a prefix to the source
name in the Alarms Pane and Alarm View if
you set the Alarm handling and
presentation property to Intrinsic in the
alarm object properties.
The Alarm handling and presentation
property determines if the prefix comes
from the notification (BACnet Notification
object) or the alarm (Intrinsic).
Auto hide Select to automatically hide the alarm in the

Alarms pane or Alarm View.
Disable state-change logging Select to prevent an alarm state change

Flashing alert Select to make the alarm row flash in the

Alarms pane and Alarm Views when the
alarm is triggered.
Audible alert Displays False if the alarm is not configured

to be audible when active.
Custom audio Browse and add to the alarm a custom

sound that you saved in
/Server/System/Audio.
Edit
Click to open the property pane where you
(Action requirements) edit the selected user action. For more
information, see the User Action Properties
topic on WebHelp.
Add
Click to open the Create Object: Attachment
(Attachments) wizard, where you add an attachment. For
more information, see the Create Object
Wizard – Naming the Object Page topic on
WebHelp.
Edit
(Attachments) configure the attachment. For more
information, see the Attachment Properties
topic on WebHelp.
Remove
Click to remove an attachment that is
(Attachments) connected to the alarm.

602
17.85 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties – Basic Tab
17.85 MP Series Controller BACnet and

System Alarm Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of MP Series controller BACnet
and system alarms. For more information, see section 7.4 “Alarms for MP Series
Figure: MP Series controller BACnet alarm properties - Basic tab

603
Figure: MP Series controller program cyclic dependency alarm properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties - Basic Tab

alarm state.

WebHelp.
Acknowledged transitions Displays whether acknowledgements for to-

off-normal, to-fault, or to-normal
transitions have been received.
To-off-normal time Displays the date and time of the last to-off-
normal transition.
To-fault time Displays the date and time of the last to-
fault transition.
To-normal time Displays the date and time of the last to-
normal transition.

604
Continued
Monitored variable In BACnet alarms, choose the method for

referencing the property that you want to
monitor:
• Select System reference to define a
path-based reference to an object or
property that is currently located on the
• Select BACnet reference to define a
reference that uses the elements of a
property value (Device instance
number, Object type, or Object
instance number) to identify a BACnet
object or property that is not currently
on the EcoStruxure BMS server but
may be uploaded or imported to the
server later. You can also use this
method to reference a BACnet object
or property on an external device.
The system automatically fills in the Device
instance number, Object type, or Object
instance number for the reference path, if
available.
In system alarms, displays the System
reference as a monitored variable. This
property is fixed and cannot be used to
define a path-based reference to an object
or property.

intrinsic alarm object that you want to use to
generate event notifications. For more
information, see the BACnet References and
System References topic on WebHelp.
Alarm handling and presentation The following information displays in the

Alarms Pane and Alarm View:
• Alarm presentation settings from the
User Action, Attachment, and
Presentation tabs of the alarm object,
and the notification object properties
• Prefix for alarm source name
Choose the data source for displaying the
information:
• Select BACnet Notification object
to gather the information from the
notification.
• Select Intrinsic to gather the
information from the alarm.

605
Continued
Notify type Select the type of BACnet event notification

to be generated:
• Select alarm to define the event as a
BACnet alarm and to display the event
in Alarm View.
• Select event to define the event as a
BACnet event and to display the event
in Event View.
Event enable Select the flags to enable the reporting of to-

off-normal and to-normal events. to-
fault reporting is not supported by BACnet
devices on EcoStruxure BMS servers.
Alarm message Enter the text that you want to display in the
Alarm View for the corresponding alarm
Reset message state. The configured text is also sent to any
Fault message external BACnet clients configured as alarm
recipients in the BACnet notification. For
more information, see the Alarms Pane and
Alarm View topic on WebHelp.

606
17.86 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties – Advanced Tab

System Alarm Properties – Advanced
Tab
MP Series controller BACnet and system alarms. For more information, see section
7.4 “Alarms for MP Series Controllers” on page 228.
Figure: MP Series controller BACnet alarm properties- Advanced tab

607
17.86 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties – Advanced Tab
Figure: MP Series controller program execution overrun alarm properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties - Advanced Tab

BACnet type Displays the type, such as event enrollment.

requirements.


608
17.87 MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties – Alarm Settings Tab

System Alarm Properties – Alarm
Settings Tab
Use the Alarm Settings tab to view and configure the alarm properties of MP
Series controller BACnet and system alarms. For more information, see section 7.4
“Alarms for MP Series Controllers” on page 228.
Figure: MP Series controller BACnet alarm properties - Alarm settings tab

609
Figure: MP Series controller RSTP port state alarm properties - Alarm settings tab
Table: MP Series Controller BACnet and System Alarm Properties - Alarm Settings
Tab
Category Enter the alarm category (if any) of the

alarms that you want to reference the
Category 2 BACnet alarm.
Cause note group Enter the cause note group that is used by
the alarm.
Action note group Enter the action note group that is used by
the alarm.
Checklist Enter the checklist that belongs to the alarm.

For more information, see the User Actions
topic on WebHelp.
Checklist required Select to require that a checklist is filled in

before acknowledging an alarm.

610
Continued
Prefix for alarm source name Type a prefix that is added to the beginning
of the source name property of an alarm
record.
The system adds a prefix to the source
name in the Alarms Pane and Alarm View if
you set the Alarm handling and
presentation property to Intrinsic in the
alarm object properties.
The Alarm handling and presentation
property determines if the prefix comes
from the notification (BACnet Notification
object) or the alarm (Intrinsic).
Auto hide Select to automatically hide the alarm in the

Alarms pane or Alarm View.
Disable state-change logging Select to prevent an alarm state change

Flashing alert Select to make the alarm row flash in the

Alarms pane and Alarm Views when the
alarm is triggered.
Audible alert Displays False if the alarm is not configured

to be audible when active.
Custom audio Browse and add to the alarm a custom

sound that you saved in
/Server/System/Audio.
Edit
(Action requirements) edit the selected user action. For more
information, see the User Action Properties
topic on WebHelp.
Add
Click to open the Create Object: Attachment
(Attachments) wizard, where you add an attachment. For
more information, see the Create Object
Wizard – Naming the Object Page topic on
WebHelp.
Edit
(Attachments) configure the attachment. For more
information, see the Attachment Properties
topic on WebHelp.
Remove
Click to remove an attachment that is
(Attachments) connected to the alarm.

611
17.88 MP Series Controller Schedule Properties – Basic Tab
17.88 MP Series Controller Schedule

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of an MP Series controller analog,
digital, enumerated, or multistate schedule.
Figure: MP Series controller schedule properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Schedule Properties - Basic Tab

Reliability Displays one of the following values to

indicate whether the properties of the
schedule are in a consistent state:
• no-fault-detected
• configuration error
• unreliable - other

612
Continued

BACnet schedule. When checked, the
schedule is in one or more of the following
states:
• In alarm: This flag remains
unchecked.
• Fault: Indicates that the Reliability
property has a value other than no-
fault-detected.
• Overridden: Indicates that a
mechanism of the BACnet device has
overridden the schedule, and that the
Value property cannot be changed by a
BACnet service. This property is not
implemented.
• Out of service: Indicates that the Out
of service property is True.
Value Displays the current value of the property

referenced by the schedule.
Previous transition time Displays the date and time when the Value
property most recently changed.
Time since previous transition (min) Displays the elapsed time in minutes or parts
since the Value property last changed.
Next transition value Displays the value of the referenced property

after the next transition.
Next transition time Displays the date and time when the Value
property will change next.
Time to next transition (min) Displays the amount of time in minutes

before the value changes.
Following transition value Displays the Value after two changes.
Following transition time Displays the date and time when the
Following transition value appears.
Time to following transition (min) Displays the amount of time in minutes

before Value changes to the Following
transition value.
Out of service Displays True when the schedule is in

service.
Displays False when the schedule is not in
service.
Effective period Click the ellipsis button.When the Date

Range dialog displays, enter the date range
when the schedule is in service. For more
information, see the Date Range Dialog Box
topic on WebHelp.

613
Continued
Default value Enter the value to be used when no other

scheduled value is in effect.

614
17.89 MP Series Controller Schedule Properties – Advanced Tab
17.89 MP Series Controller Schedule

an MP Series controller schedule.
Figure: MP Series controller schedule properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Schedule Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

615
17.90 MP Series Controller Calendar Properties – Basic Tab
17.90 MP Series Controller Calendar

Use the Basic tab to view the Value property status for an MP Series controller
calendar.
Figure: MP Series controller calendar properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Calendar Properties - Basic Tab

Value Displays True when the current date

matches a date specified in the calendar
entry in the Date List.

616
17.91 MP Series Controller Calendar Properties – Advanced Tab
17.91 MP Series Controller Calendar

an MP Series controller calendar.
Figure: MP Series controller calendar properties - advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Calendar Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

617
17.92 MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties – Basic Tab
17.92 MP Series Controller Control Loop

Use the Basic tab to view and configure the basic properties of an MP Series
controller control loop.
Figure: MP Series controller control loop properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties - Basic Tab

Value Displays the current output value of the loop

algorithm.
Out of service Displays True when the loop algorithm is

not in service.
Displays False when the loop algorithm is in
service.

618
Continued
Status flags Displays the condition or status of the loop.

When checked, the loop is in one or more of
the following states:
• In alarm: Indicates that Event state
has a condition other than Normal.
property is present and has a value
other than no-fault-detected.
• Overridden: Indicates that Value is
not changeable through BACnet
services.
Reliability Displays one of the following values to

indicate the reliability of the Value property:
• No fault detected
• Open loop
• Unreliable-other
Event state Displays Fault when the Reliability

property has a value other than No fault
detected, and the object supports intrinsic
alarming.
Displays Normal when the Reliability
property has a value of No fault detected,
or the object does not support intrinsic
alarming.

WebHelp.
Controlled variable value Displays the value of the property of the

object referenced by the Controlled
variable reference property. The
Controlled variable value is compared
with the Setpoint to calculate the error.
Controlled variable reference Choose the method for referencing the

controlled variable value:
path to a property or object reference
located on the EcoStruxure BMS server
(including hosted objects, if available).
• Select Protocol reference
(Advanced) to define a path to a
property or object reference located
anywhere on the network.

619
Continued
Setpoint Enter the loop setpoint, or view the value of

the property of the object referenced by the
Setpoint reference. The units need to
match the units of the Controlled variable
value.
Setpoint reference Choose the method for referencing the

setpoint that you want to monitor for this
event:
path-based reference to an object or
property that is currently located on the
• Select BACnet reference to define a
reference that uses the elements of a
property value (Device instance
number, Object type, or Object
instance number) to identify a BACnet
object or property that is not currently
on the server but may be uploaded or
imported to the server later. You can
also use this method to reference a
BACnet object or property on an
external device.
The system automatically fills in the Device
instance number, Object type, or Object
instance number for the reference path, if
available.
Bias Enter the bias value to be used by the loop

algorithm. If the PID loop algorithm produces
a value of n, then the final value of the loop
will be n plus the value of Bias. The units
need to match the units of the Value
property.
Maximum output Enter the maximum value that the PID

algorithm can assign to the Value property.
Minimum output Enter the minimum value that the PID loop
algorithm can assign to the Value property.
Manipulated variable reference Choose the method for referencing the

property of the object that receives the
output of the control loop displayed in the
Value property:
path to a property located on the
EcoStruxure BMS server (including
hosted objects, if available).
• Select Protocol reference
(Advanced) to define a path to a
property located anywhere on the
network.

620
Continued
Update interval (ms) Enter how often that you want the loop
algorighm to update the Value property.
Enter a time in milliseconds.
Action Select Direct or Reverse to define the

direct or reverse acting of the loop.
Proportional constant Enter the value of the proportional gain

parameter to be used by the loop algorithm.
Integral constant Enter the value of the integral gain parameter

to be used by the loop algorithm.
Derivative constant Enter the value of the derivative gain

parameter to be used by the loop algorithm.

621
17.93 MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties – Advanced Tab
17.93 MP Series Controller Control Loop

an MP Series controller control loop.
Figure: MP Series controller control loop properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Control Loop Properties - Advanced Tab


instance number of the object.
BACnet type Displays the BACnet object type.


requirements.

622
17.94 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Basic Tab
17.94 MP Series Controller Script Program

Use the Basic tab to view and change general, configuration, runtime, and status
information about your Script programs in an MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script program properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Program Properties - Basic Tab

Status flags Displays the condition or status of the loop.

When checked, the loop is in one or more of
the following states:
• In alarm: Indicates that Event state
has a condition other than Normal.
property is present and has a value
other than no-fault-detected.
• Overridden: Indicates that Value is
not changeable through BACnet
services.

623
Continued
Program change Set one of the following values to make the

corresponding program change request:
• Ready: Provides an indication that the
process is ready for a change request.
• Load: Provides a request for the
application program to be loaded if the
program has not yet been loaded.
• Run: Provides a request for the
process to begin running if the process
is not already running.
• Halt: Provides a request for the
process to halt.
• Restart: Provides a request for the
process to restart at the initialization
point.
• Unload: Provides a request for the
proces to halt and unload the
application program.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the program.
Compilation valid Displays whether the program compiled

successfully.
Compiler version Displays the Script compiler version.
Status Displays the program status.
Current line Displays the program's current line.
Line start time Displays the program's line start time.
TS Displays the number of seconds that have

elapsed since the program has been on the
current line.
TM Displays the number of minutes that have

current line.
TH Displays the number of hours that have

current line.
TD Displays the number of days that have

current line.
Scan Specifies the length in seconds of the last

interpreter interval.
Error Indicates whether the program ran

successfully or encountered an error.

624
Continued
Enabled Displays whether or not the program is

enabled.
Task Enter the task you wish to execute. For more

information, see the Tasks topic on
WebHelp.
Execution precedence Select the order in which two programs are

run when the two programs are in the same
task. Applies when there is a loop
connection between them such that the
input of one program is actually the output of
another. For more information, see the
Program Cycles in EcoStruxure Building
Operation Software topic on WebHelp.
Flow type Select the Looping or FallThru flow type

to order the way Script program instructions
are arranged and executed.
Restart Click to start the Script program.
Apply initial value Select Yes to apply the initial values of the
binding variables. The default No does not
apply the values, thus ensuring, for example,
that an output point does not reset every
time a program that binds to one of its own
output variables is saved.
Debug mode Displays either On or Off to indicate visually

whether the Script Editor is in Debug mode.
This is a read-only setting.

625
17.95 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Advanced Tab

the Script programs in your MP Series controller. You can also add, edit, or remove
object properties that trigger the Script program currently being edited.
Figure: MP Series controller Script program properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Program Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

626
17.95 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Advanced Tab
Continued
Triggers Click to open the Select Object and

Property dialog box where you can select
the MP Series controller Script program you
want to trigger the value when it changes.
Click to open the Select Object and

Property dialog box where you can edit the
pointer to the MP Series controller Script
program you want to trigger the value when
it changes.
Click to delete the pointer to the MP Series

controller Script program you want to trigger
the value when it changes.

627
17.96 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Inputs Tab

Properties – Inputs Tab
Use the Inputs tab to display the input bindings associated with the Script program
in the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script program properties - Inputs tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Program Properties - Inputs Tab

[Property name] Set the value of the bound property. Click
the Configure Settings button to

open the [Property name] dialog and its
Operation
tab.

628
17.97 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Outputs Tab

Properties – Outputs Tab
Use the Outputs tab to display the output bindings associated with the Script
program in the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script program properties - Outputs tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Program Properties - Outputs Tab

[Property name] Set the value of the bound property. Click
the Configure Settings button to

open the [Property name] dialog and its
Operation
tab.

629
17.98 MP Series Controller Script Program Properties – Functions Tab

Properties – Functions Tab
Use the Functions tab to display the function bindings associated with the Script
program in the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script program properties - Functions tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Program Properties - Functions Tab

[Function name] Select the path of the bound function and

use the ellipsis button to select the object
and property. Click the Configure
Settings button to open the [Function

name] dialog and its Operation tab.

630
17.99 MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Basic Tab
17.99 MP Series Controller Script Function

Use the Basic tab to view and change status and configuration information about
your Script functions in an MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script function properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Function Properties - Basic Tab

Compiliation valid Displays whether the program compiled

successfully.
Compiler valid Displays the Script compiler version.

631
17.100 MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Advanced Tab

Use the Advanced tab to view and change BACnet information about the Script
functions in your MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script function properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Function Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

632
17.101 MP Series Controller Script Function Properties – Functions Tab

Properties – Functions Tab
Use the Functions tab to display the function bindings associated with the Script
function in the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Script function properties - Functions tab
Table: MP Series Controller Script Function Properties - Functions Tab

[function name] Select the path of the bound function and

use the ellipsis button to select the object
and property. Click the Configure
Settings button to open the [Function

name] dialog and its Operation tab.

633
17.102 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Basic Tab
17.102 MP Series Controller Function Block

Program Properties – Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view status and execution information for the function block
programs and edit settings that affect program execution in an MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Function Block program properties - Basic tab
Table: MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties -- Basic Tab



634
Continued
Program change Set one of the following values to make the

corresponding program change request:
• Ready: Provides an indication that the
process is ready for a change request.
• Load: Provides a request for the
application program to be loaded if the
program has not yet been loaded.
• Run: Provides a request for the
process to begin running if the process
is not already running.
• Halt: Provides a request for the
process to halt.
• Restart: Provides a request for the
process to restart at the initialization
point.
• Unload: Provides a request for the
proces to halt and unload the
application program.
Reliability Displays the reliability of the program.
Compilation valid Displays True if the function block program

is complete and able to run on the SmartX
server.
Status Displays the current function block program

status. Displays Running if the program is
currently running. Displays Unloaded if the
program has never been started. Displays
Halted if the program has been manually
halted.
Number of cycles Displays the number of executed program

cycles.
Last execution time (ms) Displays the duration of the last function
block program execution.
Minimum execution time (ms) Displays the minimum duration of the last
function block program execution cycle
Maximum execution time (ms) Displays the maximum duration of the last
function block program execution cycle.
Required Function Block Program Displays the version of the function block
engine engine. Its purpose is to maintain
compatibility between EcoStruxure BMS and
MP Series controller function block
programs.
Enabled Select Yes to run the function block

program on the SmartX server.

635
Continued
Task Enter the task to set the function block

program execution frequency. For more
information, see the Tasks topic on
WebHelp.
Execution precedence Enter a number to set the execution priority

for function blocks with internal, cyclic
dependencies. A function block program
with a lower number is executed before a
function block program with a higher
number. For more information, see the
Program Cycles in EcoStruxure Building
Operation Software topic on WebHelp.

636
17.103 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Advanced Tab

Program Properties – Advanced Tab
the function block programs in your MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Function Block program properties - Advanced tab
Table: MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

637
17.104 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Inputs Tab

Program Properties – Inputs Tab
Use the Inputs tab to to select whether or not to use the input values for the
following function blocks: BI, II, PI and RI in the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Function Block program properties - Inputs tab
Table: MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties - Inputs Tab

[Block name] Select Force value to use the input value of

the function block in the function block
program. If the input has been bound, the
value is overwritten by the following program
execution cycle

638
17.105 MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties – Outputs Tab

Program Properties – Outputs Tab
Use the Outputs to view the output values for the following function blocks: BO,
IO, PO and RO in the MP Series controller.
Figure: MP Series controller Function Block program properties - Outputs tab
Table: MP Series Controller Function Block Program Properties - Outputs Tab

[Block name] Select Force value to use the output value

of the function block in the function block
program. If the output has been bound, the
value is overwritten by the following program
execution cycle.

639
17.106 SmartX Sensor Properties – Basic Tab

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of SmartX Sensor.
Figure: SmartX sensor properties - Basic tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Properties Basic Tab

System status Displays Operational when the SmartX

Sensor is operating correctly.
Address Click the DIP switch address that

corresponds to the address set previously in
the SmartX Sensor physical device. For
more information, see section 8.3 “Creating
a SmartX Sensor” on page 251.
Base model Identifies the base model.
Cover model Identifies the cover model.
Firmware version Displays the revision of the firmware

currently running in the sensor.

640
Continued

application software that is installed on the
SmartX Sensor.
Serial number Displays the serial number of the sensor.
Commissioning tool enable Click Off to send a message to the SmartX

Sensor to disable communication with the
eCommission SmartX Controllers tool
through the SmartX Sensor connection. For
security purposes, you should ensure this
property is always turned off, except during
the controller commissioning operations (or
phase).
To prevent it from being inadvertently or
maliciously turned on, you can configure an
MP Series controller BACnet Change of
state alarm using the property as the
monitored variable. This will send an alarm
message to the controller. For more
information, see section 7.6 “Configuring an
MP Series Controller BACnet Alarm” on
page 231.
Commissioning tool detected Detects the presence of a commissioning

tool.
Eco mode Click On to set the EcoMode system heating

or cooling status.

641
17.107 SmartX Sensor Properties – Advanced Tab
17.107 SmartX Sensor Properties – Advanced

Tab
the SmartX Sensor.
Figure: SmartX sensor properties - Advanced tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

642
17.108 SmartX Sensor Object Properties – Basic Tab
17.108 SmartX Sensor Object Properties –

Basic Tab
Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of SmartX Sensor CO2 (carbon
dioxide), temperature, and humidity objects.
Figure: SmartX CO2 sensor object properties - Basic tab

643
Figure: SmartX Humidity sensor object properties - Basic tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Object Properties - Basic Tab


value.
to 15000 ohms.



644
Continued


alarm state.
Calibration mode Select the calibration mode for the carbon

dioxide sensor object.
Calibration offset
Enter a calibration offset for the temperature
and humidity sensor objects.
“SmartX Sensor Operation and Calibration
Modes” on page 255.

645
17.109 SmartX Sensor Object Properties – Advanced Tab
17.109 SmartX Sensor Object Properties –

Advanced Tab
the SmartX Sensor CO2, temperature, and humidity objects.
Figure: SmartX sensor objects properties - Advanced tab



value.

requirements.

646
17.110 SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Basic Tab

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of a SmartX Sensor display
object.
Figure: SmartX sensor display object properties - Basic tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties - Basic Tab

Setpoint Enter the setpoint for the SmartX Sensor.
Fan speed Click to set the current fan speed. Valid

states include:
• Auto
• Off
• On
• 1
• 2
• 3

647
17.110 SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Basic Tab
Continued
Occupancy override Click On to provide a temporary override to

an occupied state. Once activated, the
override timer begins. When the override
timer elapses, the component’s value
becomes inactive.
HVAC mode Click to set the current HVAC mode. Valid

states include:
• Auto
• Off
• Heat
• Cool
Heating cooling status Click to set the system heating or cooling

status. Valid values include:
• Off
• Heat
• Cool
• EcoMode

648
17.111 SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties – Advanced Tab

Use the Advanced tab to view and set the properties for the SmartX Sensor
display object.
Figure: SmartX sensor display object properties - Advanced tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Display Object Properties - Advanced tab




value.

requirements.

649
Continued
Show time Click On to show the time setting. The

default setting is On.
Time format Click to display the time format (either 24:00

or 12:00). The default setting is 24:00.
Show CO2 Click On to show the CO2 level. The default

setting is Off.
Show humidity Click On to show the humidity. The default

setting is Off.
Temperature units Click to display the temperature units (either

Celcius or Fahrenheit). The default setting is
Celcius.
Allowed fan speeds Click to specify fan speeds. Valid options

include:
• Off-On-Auto
• Off-Low-High-Auto
• Off-123-Auto
The default setting is Off-On-Auto.
Enable wall back lighting Click On to enable wall back lighting. The
Allowed HVAC modes Click to specify HVAC modes. Valid options

include:
• Auto
• Auto-Heat
• Auto-Cool
• Auto-Heat-Cool
The default setting is Auto.
Allow setpoint changes Click On to allow setpoint changes. The

Setpoint high limit Enter a high limit for the setpoint.
Setpoint low limit Enter a low limit for the setpoint.
Allow fan speed changes Click On to allow fan speed changes. The
Allow occupancy overrides Click On to allow occupancy overrides. The

Allow HVAC mode changes Click On to alow HVAC mode changes. The
Allow menu page Click On to allow menu pages to display.


650
Continued
Allow information pages Click the page(s) to display the specified

information.
Allow temperature unit changes Click On to allow temperature unit changes.

Display back light Click the specified back light setting. Valid
settings are:
• On
• Off
• On by motion
• On by touch

651
17.112 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Basic Tab
17.112 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object

Use the Basic tab to view and edit the properties of a SmartX Sensor occupancy
object.
Figure: SmartX sensor occupancy object properties - Basic tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties - Basic Tab


value.
to 15000 ohms.


652
17.112 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Basic Tab
Continued



alarm state.
Sensitivity Enter the sensitivity of the occupancy sensor

as a percentage, with 0% being the lowest
and 100% being the highest sensitivity
values.

653
17.113 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties – Advanced Tab
17.113 SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object

the SmartX Sensor occupancy object.
Figure: SmartX sensor occupancy object properties - Advanced tab
Table: SmartX Sensor Occupancy Object Properties - Advanced Tab




value.

requirements.

654
18 MP Series Controller Deep
Technical Reference
Topics
Dynamic IP Address Assignment
18 MP Series Controller Deep Technical Reference
18.1 Dynamic IP Address Assignment

Dynamic IP addressing assigns an IP address to a controller using these methods
and priorities:
• Priority 1: DCHP server assigned
Uses an IP offered by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.
• Priority 2: Controller assigned
Uses a private IP address (link-local address) assigned by the controller using
Auto-IP.
Using the DHCP server always takes precedence over the controller's private IP
assignment. In both cases, however, IP address conflicts are detected before the
address is enabled in the controller. For more information, see section 1.17 “IP
Address Conflict Detection and Failover” on page 56.
18.1.1 Private IP Networks

A private IP network is a network that uses the private IP address space defined by
RFC standards (RFC 1918 IPv4). You can use these addresses without approval
from a regional Internet registry. Devices with private IP addresses cannot transmit
IP packets through the public Internet without a network address translator (NAT)
gateway or proxy server and are therefore limited to a single network segment (link).
It is possible for you to configure some DHCP servers to assign a private IP
addresses to a private IP network.
18.1.2 Link-local Addresses

A link-local address is a private address that uses the link-local address range and
is assigned locally by the end-point. In this case, that is the controller. Because link-
local addresses are non-routable, you can use the same IP address on multiple
network segments (links) without a conflict. For IPv4, the link-local address block is
169.254.0.1 to 169.254.255.254.
Note
Link-local address assignment is also used in popular automatic network
configuration solutions. While these protocols utilize the same link-local address
assignment method as the MP Series controller, they may provide additional
functionality not implemented in those controllers.
You can use these technologies on the same private network where the MP
Series controller resides:
• Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA): Microsoft’s term for link-local
addressing used in Windows operation systems since Windows 98. APIPA
provides the same functions as Link-local addressing.
• Zero-configuration networking (zeroconf): Provides the following three
services:
– Link-local network address assignment
– Automatic distribution and resolution of hostnames

657
18 MP Series Controller Deep Technical Reference
– Automatic location of network services without the presence of DHCP or

DNS servers
• Bonjour: Apple Computer’s implementation of zeroconf.
18.1.3 DHCP Server Assigned IP

DHCP servers operate by assigning an IP address to the Ethernet MAC address of
the DHCP clients.
If a DHCP server is detected by the dynamic IP process, the controller negotiates
with the server for an IP address. If successful, the DHCP server takes ownership
for managing the controller's IP address. Where the client is the MP Series
controller, the standard DHCP negotiation process applies:
• DHCP Discover: Client (controller) broadcasts an IP request for all DHCP
servers available on the network.
• DHCP Offer: All DHCP servers on the network with available addresses
respond with an IP address. Multiple servers can respond with an offer.
• DHCP Request: Client (controller) chooses an IP address and sends back a
request to the DHCP server that offered the address.
• DHCP Ack or DHCP NAck: Usually, the DHCP server ends the process with an
acknowledgement (Ack) to allow the client to start using the address. If the IP
address is no longer available (or the DHCP server is malfunctioning), the
DHCP server sends back a negative acknowledgement (NAck).
If the DHCP server does not respond or cannot provide the controller with an IP
address, the dynamic IP process falls back to the controller assigning the IP
address.
18.1.4 Controller-assigned IP
When a DHCP server is not available on the network segment or the DHCP fails to
provide an IP address, dynamic IP addressing in the MP Series controller assigns a
private IP address locally within the link-local address block. The link-local address
block for IPv4 ranges from 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255. These are class-B
addresses with a default mask value of 255.255.0.0.
Link-local addresses are not routable. As a result, controllers that assign their own
IP address can only communicate with devices on their local network segment.
When an IP address is controller-assigned, the controller continues to check for
available DHCP servers by issuing a DHCP discover broadcast. If a DHCP server is
detected, dynamic IP addressing proceeds with the standard DHCP negotiation for
an IP address and uses the DHCP assigned address, if successful.

658
Troubleshooting
Topics
Device Custom Type Versions Do Not Match
MP Series Controller Does Not Display in Device Discovery
Duplicate MP Series Controller Device IDs
MP Series Controller Program Bindings Cyclic Dependency
MP Series Controller Program Execution Overrun
MP Series Controller Device Already Hosted Message
Device Custom Types Do Not Match
Device Model Mismatch
Unexpected Type Information
Device Address Bindings Limit
19 MP Series Controller Troubleshooting
19.1 Device Custom Type Versions Do Not Match
19.1 Device Custom Type Versions Do Not

Match
A warning is displayed when you try to associate an MP Series controller with an
object with a matching shared type but a different version. This can happen if the
device is checked out and modified and then checked back in.
19.1.1 Solution
Accept the association by clicking Continue. If you do this, you will need to
download all objects. Executing the Download all objects command will delete
any objects on the physical device.

661
19.2 MP Series Controller Does Not Display in Device Discovery
19.2 MP Series Controller Does Not Display in

Device Discovery
An MP Series controller does not display in the Device Discovery view.
19.2.1 Solution
first. Work through each solution until the problem is resolved
• Verify that the device is connected to a network or sub-network in the BACnet
Interface.
• Be sure also there is an established path for BACnet discovery messages to
reach the target device (such as BACnet routers linking the BACnet network
and remote IP segments that require BBMD configuration).
• Click the Discover all button if the device still does not display. This may
take a few minutes depending on the number of devices in the BACnet
Interface.
• Devices that were previously discovered and hidden also may not display. For
more information, see section 3.7 “Hiding MP Series Controllers in Device
Discovery ” on page 101.

662
19.3 Duplicate MP Series Controller Device IDs
19.3 Duplicate MP Series Controller Device

IDs
In the Alarm View of an MP Series controller, a Duplicate device identifier alarm
displays when two devices contain the same ID.
19.3.1 Solution
Determine which device(s) contain the duplicate device IDs and then correct them
by specifying an ID that does not conflict with any other device.
For more information, see section 2.15 “Changing an MP Series Controller Device
ID” on page 80.

663
19.4 MP Series Controller Program Bindings Cyclic Dependency
19.4 MP Series Controller Program Bindings

Cyclic Dependency
In the Alarm View of an MP Series controller, a Program Cyclic Dependency
alarm displays when a number of programs and other application objects are
bound so that the bindings for value transfer form a cyclic dependency (mutually
dependent loop). In such cases, the value has no definitive starting point.
19.4.1 Solution
• Reconfigure the application to eliminate the loop by ensuring that no value in
the chain references more than one other value in the chain.
• Lower the execution precedence of the program that initiates processing at the
beginning of each execution cycle, if the cyclic loop is intentional. Cyclic
dependency checking in MP Sereis controllers is (or should be) identical to
cyclic dependency checking in EcoStruxure BMS servers.

664
19.5 MP Series Controller Program Execution Overrun
19.5 MP Series Controller Program Execution

Overrun
In the Alarm View of an MP Series controller, a Program Execution Overrun
alarm displays when a program (or multiple programs) is unable to fulfill all
operations within the specified task time. Typically, program execution for a given
time slot falls more than 10 samples behind before this alarm displays.
19.5.1 Solution
• Ensure that the Script program does not contain a loop with many iterations.
• Move larger, more complex programs to slower tasks.
• Separate programs into smaller parts, keeping the critical and smaller sub-
programs in the faster task slots.

665
19.6 MP Series Controller Device Already Hosted Message
19.6 MP Series Controller Device Already

Hosted Message
In the Device Discovery view, an error message displays if you attempt to drag
devices to the System Tree pane and some of those devices are already hosted in
19.6.1 Solution
Clear the hosting information for the specified controller(s). For more information,
see section 3.8 “Clearing MP Series Controller Host Information ” on page 102.

666
19.7 Device Custom Types Do Not Match
19.7 Device Custom Types Do Not Match

A warning is displayed when you try to associate an MP Series controller with an
object that has a different custom type.
19.7.1 Solution
• Accept the association by clicking Continue, then download all objects.
Doing this overwrites everything on the physical device with what is on the
device object.
• Accept the association by clicking Continue, then upload all objects. Doing
this overwrites everything on the device object with what is on the physical
device.

667
19.8 Device Model Mismatch
19.8 Device Model Mismatch

An alarm is triggered when the device object is replaced with the incorrect model at
any time.
19.8.1 Solution
• When replacing a physical device, replace it with only a device that is the same
model.

668
19.9 Unexpected Type Information
19.9 Unexpected Type Information

The device object has an image file that is not empty. Most likely, the controller has
been field-deployed once more after it has already been hosted by an EcoStruxure
BMS server.
19.9.1 Solution
Resolve the unexpected type information issues. For more information, see section
2.18 “Resetting MP Series Controller Type Information ” on page 84.

669
19.10 Device Address Bindings Limit
19.10 Device Address Bindings Limit

A no resource space error displays when you add output binding references to
external binding producer objects. This indicates you have reached the device
address bindings limit of 255 devices, including the hosting EcoStruxure BMS
server (either a SmartX AS-P server or an Enterprise Server).
19.10.1 Solution
View the number of devices with BACnet bindings originating from themselves by
viewing the Device Address Binding properties tab in the MP Series Controller.
For more information, see the BACnet Device – Device Address Bindings Tab topic
on WebHelp.

670
Schneider Electric – Buildings Division
www.schneider-electric.com/buildings
© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx

MP-X Devices - SBO - Feb 8 - 2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MP-X Devices - SBO - Feb 8 - 2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MP-X Devices - SBO - Feb 8 - 2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

StruxureWare

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

2 MP Series Controller Creation and Configuration .......... 59

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

3 MP Series Controller Management and

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

4 MP Series Controller I/O Points .................................. 117

5 MP Series Controller Value Objects ............................ 183

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

6 Programming Languages for MP Series Controllers .... 215

7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend Logs for MP Series

8 SmartX Sensors ......................................................... 241

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

9 SmartX Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ....................... 267

10 SmartX Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ........ 275

11 SmartX Sensor Touchscreen Display Mode ................ 291

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

12 SmartX Sensors User Interface .................................. 315

13 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool ....................... 327

14 MP-V Variable Air Volume Data Object Configuration .. 335

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

15 MP-V User Interface ................................................... 391

16 MP-V Troubleshooting ............................................... 443

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

17 MP Series Controller User Interface ............................ 449

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

18 MP Series Controller Deep Technical Reference ......... 655

19 MP Series Controller Troubleshooting ........................ 659

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

The Reference part contains conceptual information,

1.1 MP Series Controller Overview

1.1.1 MP Series Controller Open and IT Standards

1.1.2 MP Series Controller Types

1.1.3 MP Series Controller Management and

1.1.4 MP Series Controller I/O Points

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

1.1.5 MP Series Controller Value Objects

1.1.6 Programming Languages for MP Series

1.1.7 Schedules, Alarms, and Trend Logs for MP

1.1.8 SmartX Sensors

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

1.1.9 eCommission SmartX Controllers Tool

1.1.10 VAV Support and the MP Series Controller -

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

1.2 MP Series Controller Open and IT

1.2.1 MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support

1.2.2 MP Series Controller Networking Standards

1.2.3 MP Series Controller Network Topologies

MP-X Engineering xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx,

1.2.4 Configure an Isolated MP Series Controller

1.2.5 Before Hosting an MP Series Controller

1.2.6 EcoStruxure BMS Server Hosting an MP Series

1.2.7 IP Address Assignment for MP Series

xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx, MP-X Engineering

1.3 MP Series Controller BACnet/IP Support

1.3.1 Additional Functions